PROCUREMENT SERVICES ADDENDA - Connecticut 1...end of the construction phase floors and walls shall...

PROCUREMENT SERVICES

ADDENDA Date February 26th 2010 Addendum Number # 1

REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS FOR SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS

RFR NUMBER 4986

DUE DATE 2:00 PM March 4th, 2010 This Addendum is a contract document modifying previously issued documents, which remain in full force except as specifically modified below. Quotations appearing on the Proposal are to reflect the provisions of this Addendum. Failure to acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the response sheet may subject candidate to disqualification. Drawings: A-1 About three (3) bricks are damaged on the interior south-west wall; the re-pointing is

about 3 sf. located on the north wall by the plumbing chase. A-3 The mirror is not continuous; the column is visible on the room side. A-4 The damaged wood deck is to be replaced with the planks to match the existing; It is

unknown if the planks are tongue and groove, however the contractors are encouraged to visit the site again and get that information.

A-8 Delete the notes about Toilet Partitions and Soy based spray above the ceiling. M-1 Use the same openings to reinstall the Unit Ventilators from Game Room to Sewing

Room. M-1 The system was apparently balanced as part of the previous project; some issues have

been raised for the system in the police areas as well as on the administration office on the third floor.

Add Sk-1 Lighting / Power at Back Entry (See attached sketch) Add Sk-2 Vertical Bar Detail @ HC Bathroom (See attached sketch)

Specifications

03300 Delete this section in its entirety 08711 Delete this section in its entirety

General:

1 Use chemical strippers to clean the paint areas of the wooden deck.

2 The curved glass block walls are to be installed using mortar not grids as outlined on the specifications. The contractor can use the specified grid system on the flat walls at the library and machine exercise room if desired.

3 The scope of work on the third floor consists only of a wall and a door as shown on the drawing; no work is scheduled on the adjacent closets. The wall shall receive at each side, a cove base to match the existing.

4 There are cold, hot water lines and a vent on the existing central kitchenette few feet away from the future Arts & Crafts room where the new sink will be located.

5 Furniture will be removed by the Center authorities. 6 Bamboo flooring products can be purchased and installed .from the following

manufacturers: Bamboohardwoods; EcoTimber or TeraGreen companies. This flooring shall be solid, cut from plants older than five years, color to be natural and with horizontal pattern. The walls on this room shall also have 6” high cove base on the same material, and a bamboo transition strip (threshold) below the door separating the carpeted corridor.

7 The LED handrail shall be as manufactured by the Wagner Companies or approved similar. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for this item

8 The entrance canopy shall be manufactured by Mountain Manufacturing and Marketing Company or approved similar. Shop drawings shall be submitted for this item.

9 The ceramic tile on the walls and floors in the toilets shall remain. Special care shall be observed during construction to protect these finishes; at the end of the construction phase floors and walls shall be restored to near new condition.

10 The lobby exit door shall be kept opening into the stair as shown. 11 The new duct work will not be painted. 12 The pendant lighting fixtures shall be Verve III, 48” long; the corridor lights

shall be Verve III wall mounted and the wall sconces shall be 11” d. wall mounted Mondana, all manufactured by Focal Point.

13 The 2’x 2’ ceiling mounted lighting fixtures are to match the existing at the third and second floor.

14 At the rooms with exposed wood ceiling the upward sprinklers shall remain and the pendant sprinklers shall be removed; at the areas with ACT, the upward sprinklers shall remain. In addition, the pendant ones shall be relocated to the center of nearest ceiling tile. Please follow the indications on Drawing P FP-1

15 For Lead Paint Testing Results see the attached Lead-Based Paint Screen Report by Eagle Environmental dated February 25, 2010.

All remaining specifications, terms and conditions remain the same.

Carita Rozie

Principal Administrative Analyst

End of Addendum #1

Company Name – ______________________________

REQUEST FOR RESPONSE BID NO: 4986

Department of Public Works Project No: F08-14

SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS 830 MAPLE AVENUE, HARTFORD, CT

DEADLINE: 2:00 P.M., THURSDAY, MARCH 4, 2010 _______________________________ Carita Rozie Principal Administrative Analyst [email protected]

Invitation To Respond

INVITATION TO RESPOND PROJECT NUMBER: BIDNO: 4986

CONTRACT NUMBER F08-14

DEADLINE : 2:00 PM, MARCH 4, 2010

BID TITLE : SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS

SITE LOCATION: 830 MAPLE AVENUE, HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT The City of Hartford is soliciting proposals for the South End Senior Center Improvements Project. This Contract is for miscellaneous site work; complete outfitting of second floor areas, HVAC work throughout and miscellaneous first and third floor alterations. Below is an outline of some of the requirements that apply specifically to this project. These requirements are discussed in greater detail in Section 3, General Information. BID INFORMATION (if not attached) is available upon receipt of this invitation over the Internet at http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Home.asp. Drawings associated with this bid, if not included within the bid documents can be viewed at http://www.merrittgraphics.com/. Click on the PlanWell link, select "Public PlanRoom", then select this project. Hard copies may be purchased from Merritt Graphics. Fees to purchase sets are non-refundable and will be posted on the site. Additionally, plans may be ordered by calling Merritt Graphics at 800.344.4477 and requesting an order form. Adobe Acrobat reader may be required to view some of this information. If you do not have this software you may down load it for free from Adobe. A link to the Adobe site is provided on the internet bid page. Businesses without internet access equipment, may contact the Procurement Services Department at 860.757.9610 for any Bid information. Our fax number is 860.722.6607. A PRE-BID Conference will be held on Tuesday, February 16, 2010 at 10:30 A.M at the South End Senior Center located at 830 Maple Avenue, Hartford, CT. All prospective Bidders are requested to meet at the rear Main Entry. Bidding Contractors are requested to attend this pre-bid conference or make other arrangements to visit the site. Contact Carita Rozie at 757-9614 for further information. Bidders will be required to provide:

• 10% bid bond, cashier's or certified check with your response (see Standard Instructions). NOTE: The City of Hartford is now providing contractors with the option of submitting an electronic Bid Bond through the Surety2000 website.

Surety 2000 is an Internet-based surety processing, verification and security system, developed in cooperation with the surety industry. Contractors and Surety Agents may contact Surety 2000 at: 1-800-660-3263 or by going to www.surety2000.com for more information.

• Performance and Payment bonds for 100% of the project upon award if the contract

value exceeds $50,000.00 (see Standard Instructions).

http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Home.asp

http://www.merrittgraphics.com/


• Copies of current Federal, State and City certifications as applicable. SPECIAL NOTES: A. Questions related to this project must be received in writing 72 hours in advance of the

response submittal deadline. We strongly recommend that prospective Candidates review specifications early in the solicitation process and submit all questions at one time. Written questions are to be sent to the buyer whose name appears on the invitation via email.

B. A Bidder, as a condition of receiving the award of this contract, will be required to comply

with Chapter 2, Article X, (Equal Employment Opportunity) of the Municipal Code and the “Greater Hartford Affirmative Action Plan”.

C. A delinquent tax status will be considered in determining whether a Bidder is responsible. D. A Bidder receiving an award will be required to provide proof of Its current standing with the

Connecticut Secretary of State's Office (see Response Section, Bidder’s Qualifications). E. The DAS Contractor Prequalification Program (Public Act 03-215) requires all contractors to

prequalify “before they can bid on any construction, alteration, remodeling, repair or demolition of any public building (does not apply to road construction), for work by the state or a municipality, estimated to cost more than $500,000 and which is funded in whole or in part with state funds. This project is subject to the state prequalification provisions if indicated in the “Construction Contract Summary Sheet” located at the front of this document. Information and application forms related to this program are located on the internet at:http://www.das.state.ct.us/Business_Svs/PreQual/Prequal.asp.

PLAN HOLDERS LISTS are available from Merritt Graphics’ PlanWell site locates at http://www.merrittgraphics.com/. Lists of Bidders having picked up bid documents will not be provided over the phone. If, after review of the bid documents, your firm is interested in performing the services specified, provide the information and documentation requested, sign and return the complete document, along with your detailed response, to Procurement Services by the due date. We would appreciate the courtesy of promptly advising us if you do not intend to respond. Sincerely, Carita Rozie Principal Administrative Analyst [email protected]

http://www.das.state.ct.us/Business_Svs/PreQual/Prequal.asp

http://www.merrittgraphics.com/


CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SUMMARY SHEET

RFR NUMBER: BIDNO: 4986


BID TITLE : SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS ESTIMATED CONSTRUCTION COST: $500,000 CONTRACT TYPE: (X) OPEN COMPETITIVE WITH W/MBE % GOAL ( ) SMALL MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SET ASIDE ( ) SMALL CONTRACTOR SET ASIDE STATE OF CONNECTICUT PREQUALIFICATION REQUIRED: (X) YES ( ) NO PERCENTAGE OF MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION REQUIRED: 15% FEDERAL WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS: ( ) YES (X) NO STATE WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS: (X) YES ( ) NO HARTFORD BASED BIDDER ADVANTAGE: ( APPLICABLE (X) NON-APPLICABLE PLANS AVAILABLE AS PART OF BID DOCUMENTS: (X) YES ( ) NO SPECIAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS: ( ) YES (X) NO ____________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________ CALENDAR DAYS ALLOWED FOR CONTRACT WORK: 120 calendar days LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR LATE COMPLETION: $1,000 PER DAY DISCLAIMER: THIS SHEET IS PROVIDED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY AND IS SOLELY INTENDED TO ASSIST BIDDERS IN UNDERSTANDING THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK. BIDDERS MUST REFER TO SPECIFIC CONTRACT SECTIONS FOR DETAILS. IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT, THE PROJECT AND CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THIS CONTRACT SUMMARY SHEET.

830 Maple Avenue



TABLE OF CONTENTS RFR NUMBER: BIDNO: 4986


BID TITLE : SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS

GENERAL INFORMATION

Title Page (Front Cover) 1 Invitation To Respond 2 Project Summary Sheet 1 Site Location Map 1 Table of Contents (this document) 2 Sample Form of Contract, included in this document by reference is

available at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm Document titled: Sample Form of Agreement_AIA A101

Sample General and Supplementary Conditions, included in this document by reference is available at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm Document titled: General Conditions of the Contract_AIA A201

Sample Performance Bond, included in this document by reference is available at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm Document titled: Sample Performance Bond_AIA A312

RESPONSE FORMS

1.0 Response Forms 1 1.1 Response Signature Form 1 1.2 Response Pricing 1 1.3 Statement of Qualifications 2 1.4 Subcontractor Information Forms 3 1.5 Bidder’s EEO Status and Report 1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Technical Specifications

Division 1 – General Requirements

Section 01010 Summary of Work 8 Section 01020 Allowances 2 Section 01100 Alternates 2 Division 2 – Sitework

Section 02070 Selective Removals & Demolition 2 Division 3 – Concrete

Section 003300 Cast In Place Concrete 7 Section 003610 Grouting 2 Division 4 – Masonry

Section 04810 Unit masonry 10 Division 5 – Metals

Section 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings 5

http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm







Division 6 – Wood and Plastic

Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 3 Section 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 6 Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection

Section 07811 Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials 7 Section 07841 Through Penetration Firestop System 6 Section 07920 Joint Sealers 9 Division 8 – Doors and Windows

Section 08110 Steel Frames 5 Section 08210 Wood Doors 5 Section 08710 Finish Hardware 16 Section 08800 Glazing 8 Section 08810 Glass Block 2 Division 9 – Finishes

Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 9 Section 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 5 Section 09651 Resilient Flooring 4 Section 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 4 Section 09680 Carpet 3 Section 09900 Painting 10 Division 10 – Specialties

Section 10425 Signage 3 Section 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 4 Division 15 – Mechanical

Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 12 Section 15060 Hangers and Supports 9 Section 15075 Mechanical Identification 6 Section 15081 Duct Insulation 9 Section 15110 Valves 13 Section 15140 Domestic Water Piping 7 Section 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 6 Section 15140 Plumbing Fixtures 8 Section 15815 Metal Ducts 9 Section 15820 Duct Accessories 11 Section 15855 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 3 Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 24 Division 16 – Electrical

Section 16050 Electrical Materials and Methods 4 Section 16072 Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints 7 Section 16075 Electrical Identification 8 Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 6 Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes 10 Section 16140 Wiring Devices 7 Section 16410 Enclosed Switches 5 Section 16511 Interior Lighting 7 Section 16720 Fire Alarm Addressable System 5


LIST OF DRAWINGS

SHEET NUMBER TITLE T-1 Title / Cover Sheet I-01 Information Sheet C-01 Code Information, Egress Plan & Partition Types SP-1 Site Plan SP-2 Site Plan Details and Enlarged Plan D-1 Demolition Plan A-1 Construction Plan / Partial Floor Plans A-2 Interior Elevations A-3 Interior Elevations A-4 Reflected Ceiling Plan A-5 Ceiling and Gypsum Board Details A-6 Door Schedule, Details, & Signage A-7 Millwork and Miscellaneous Details A-8 Finish Schedule, Flooring Plan, Thresholds & Accessories P/FP-1 Sprinkler Plan MD-1 HVAC Demolition Plan M-1 HVAC Plan E-1 Power Plan E-2 Lighting Plan

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR PREPARATION OF A RESPONSE

Revision 050809 3.1 How To Respond: 3.2 Transaction Fee 3.3 Bidder’s Tax Status 3.4 Bid Bond 3.5 Prevailing Wages 3.6 Withdrawal Or Modification Of Bid 3.7 Examination Of Site And Documents 3.8 Questions & Addenda 3.9 Oral Statements Not Binding 3.10 Basis For Award 3.11 Criteria For Award 3.12 Evaluation Of Bidders 3.13 Notice Of Award 3.14 Performance Bond And Labor & Material Bond 3.15 Insurance 3.16 Failure To Execute Contract 3.17 Performance Evaluation 3.18 Contract Documents 3.19 Subcontractors 3.20 Equal Employment Opportunity/Affirmative Action 3.21 EEO/Affirmative Action Report


3.22 Compliance With Law 3.23 Governing Law LABOR COMPLIANCE WAGE RATES SAMPLE FORMS - included in this document by reference, are

available at http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm Document titled: Standard Construction Sample Forms:

Certificate of Non-segregated Facilities 1 Notification of Job Openings During Project 1 About Compliance Reports 1 Monthly Workforce Utilization Report 1 Monthly M/WBE Payment Status Report 1 Final M/WBE Payment Status Report 1


http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Forms/Sample%20Forms%20-%20Std%20Construction.doc

SECTION 1.0

RESPONSE FORMS Responses are to be delivered to:

Hartford City Hall, Procurement Services, 550 Main Street, Suite 100 Hartford, Ct. 06103.

no later than the deadline date and time. Be sure to indicate the request number, name, and opening time in the spaces provided. Mark the original response package as "ORIGINAL" on the front cover. See Section 3.1 for more information. Response Check List (NOTE: This Check List may not contain every response item for every solicitation. It is the Responder’s responsibility to ensure submittal of all required response information.)

Response Signature form completed (Section 1.1) Response pricing completed (Section 1.2) Statement of Qualifications completed (Section 1.3) Certified by the City as an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer

(http://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/ohr2.0/MWBE Certification.htm) Current in taxes and other fees owed to the City? Acknowledged Addenda (Section 1.1) Satisfy Living Wage requirements for service contracts where local labor pool is used

(http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm) Bid bond (if required in the Invitation To Respond) Current with State’s Pre-Qualification Requirements?

(http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/redir_Prequal.asp) Satisfy the Minority Utilization requirement (indicated on the Summary page, usually

page 2 of the bid documents) and completed the forms (found at the end of Section 1) The electronic files, from which you printed your hard copy proposal, are to be emailed

to the buyer within one hour AFTER the deadline for submitting hard copy responses. See section 3.1 E

Electronic Bid Bonds * If a bid bond is required and you choose to submit an electronic bid bond, please be advised that upon signing your bid with the digital signature you are also signing the Bid Bond. All legal obligations associated with the bid bond will be validated upon signing of the bid with the digital signature.

Section 1, Response Forms

http://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/ohr2.0/MWBE


http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/redir_Prequal.asp

1.1 RESPONSE SIGNATURE FORM – South End Senior Center Improvements – RFR # 4986, DPW Project # F08-14

Company Name -

Address -

Phone - Fax - Email -

Manager - Fed ID# The undersigned hereby declares that he/she or they are thoroughly familiar with the specifications, the various sites, the City’s requirements, and the objectives for each element of the project item or service and understands that in signing this proposal all right to plead any misunderstanding regarding the same is waived. The undersigned further understands and agrees that he will furnish and provide all the necessary material, machinery, implements, tools, labor, services, and other items of whatever nature, and to do and perform all the work necessary under the aforesaid conditions, to carry out the contract and to accept in full compensation therefore the amount of the contract as agreed to by the Contractor and the City. The undersigned hereby declares that no reason or persons other than those named herein are interested in this proposal, which is made without any connection with any other person or persons making any proposal for the same work and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud; that no person acting for or employed by the City of Hartford is directly or indirectly interested therein, or in the supplies or works to which it relates, or will receive any part of the profit or any commission there from in any manner which is unethical or contrary to the best interest of said City of Hartford. The undersigned additionally declares that they are not debarred or suspended, or otherwise excluded from, or ineligible for, participation in City of Hartford, State of Connecticut or federally funded projects (Executive Order 12549). The undersigned certifies under penalty of false statement that the information provided in this response is true. Delivery / Initiate Services: Calendar days after receipt of contract.

Electronic Bond #

Bid Security provided by

For electronic bonds enter bond number otherwise check the appropriate box

Bond (hard copy)

Certified

Check

EEO Certification Status (check one) See General Information for Preparing a Response paragraph 3.10

Current and on file

EEO form attached

DAS Prequalified Contractor? (non highway constructionprojects >$500,000 see: http://www.das.state.ct.us/ Certificate

attached Update

Statement attached

Insurance Agent Name - Tel.-

Submitted by -

Printed name and title Date (Authorized Agent of Company)

The above signatory acknowledges receipt of the following addenda issued during the bidding period and understands that they are a part of the bidding documents (if applicable): Addendum # . Dated . Addendum # . Dated .

Addendum # . Dated . Addendum # . Dated .

Page 2, Response Forms

http://surety2000.com/

http://www.das.state.ct.us/

1.2 RESPONSE PRICING BASE BID and ALTERNATES BASE BID as shown on the contract drawings and in the specifications. (Includes Owner Contingency Allowance of $40,000)

$

Base Bid in words (if submitting a handwritten response)

Alternate #1: Add to the Base Contract Sum the cost to replace existing spandrel glass with clear glass at the upper portions of the Second Floor windows and portions of the Third Floor windows as shown on drawings D-1 and A-1. Glass thickness and color shall match the existing lower portion glass. R values of new glass shall meet current code requirements.

$

Alternate #2: Add to the Base Contract Sum the cost to clean the entire side (north) and rear (east) parking lot areas. Remove debris and vegetation, clean all cracks and potholes and fill with new asphalt. Restripe all areas with yellow lines and blue handicap accessible signage using DOT standards and graphics as shown on drawing SP-1. Number every parking stall as indicated using font and size as approved by Architect.

$


1.3 STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS Please answer the following questions regarding your company's past performance. Attach a financial statement or other supportive documentation. Failure to reply to this instruction may be regarded as justification for rejecting a bid. 1. Number of years in business - DUNS Number: 2. Number of personnel employed Part time - , Full time - , 3. List six contracts of this type/size your firm has completed within the last three years: Project Date Contact Person Phone No.

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . . 4. DAS CONTRACTOR PREQUALIFICATION

You certify that there has been no substantial change in your financial position or corporate structure since your most recent prequalification certificate was issued or renewed, other than those changes noted in the update statement (attached).

YES

NO

general partnership

limited partnership

limited liability corporation

limited liability partnership,

corporation doing business under a trade name

individual doing business under a trade name

5. ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF BIDDER (check which applies)

other (specify)

Connecticut corporations - Will the Secretary of State be able to issue a Certificate of Good Standing within 30 days of the bid opening?

Yes

No

6. STATUS OF THE BUSINESS AND ITS CURRENT STANDING WITH THE SECRETARY OF STATE'S OFFICE; e.g., are all required filings current andin good standing or has the entity been withdrawn or canceled See General Information for Responding paragraph 3.17

Out-of -State corporations - Do you have a valid license to do business in the State of Connecticut? If a license is not required for the services being provided have you filed with the Connecticut Secretary of State?

Yes

No


7. Is your local organization an affiliate of a parent company? If so, Indicate the principal place of business of your company and the name of the agent for service if different from what has been indicated on the response form:

Business Name .

Address .

City . State . Zip .

Name of Agent . NOTE: In the case of a Limited Liability Corporation or a Limited Liability Partnership a certified copy of the Articles of Organization certified as valid and in effect as of the date of the bid opening will be required within 30 days of the bid opening. A listing of the corporate officers, in the case of a corporation; the general or managing partners, in the case of a partnership; or the managers and members in the case of either a limited liability partnership or company will be required within 30 days of the bid opening. 8. Your company may be asked to submit the following information relative to your company's financial statements prior to receiving an award. This information will not be part of the public bidding record and will remain confidential if it is submitted via an email that requests confidentiality or it hand delivered, in a separate sealed envelop marked “Confidential.” All information should be supported with appropriate audited financials. a. Book Value (Total Assets (-) Total Liabilities) b. Working Capital (Current Assets (-) Current Liabilities c. Current Ratio (Current Assets/Current Liabilities) d. Debt to Equity Ratio (Long Term Debt/Shareholder's Equity) e. Return on Assets (Net Income/Total Assets) f. Return on Equity (Net Income/Shareholder's Equity) g. Return on Invested Capital (Net Income/Long Term Debt = Shareholders' Equity) 9. Taxpayer's Identification Number: Respondents must provide their Taxpayer Identification Number on the response form (Fed ID#). Award recipients, whether an individual, proprietor, partnership or a non-profit corporation or organization must file the Internal Revenue Service Form W-9, Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification with the City. Copies of this form are available at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm Additional information may be requested subsequent to your responding to this solicitation. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR INFORMATION Forms labeled Section 1.4 are provided below to accommodate the Base Bid (or Lump Sum) and alternates (if called for) in this Request for Response (RFR).


http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm

The information provided below applies to: (Check one box as appropriate) Base Bid Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 Alternate 4 Alternate 5

1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR INFORMATION If subcontractors are to be used, indicate the firm name, address, portion or section of work the subcontractor will be performing, the subcontract value, percentage of base bid and if the subcontractor is a City certified W/MBE business. Bidder agrees to subcontract the portion of the work stipulated below to W/MBE businesses. A copy of the contract between the bidder and the subcontractor will be required prior to award of the contract. Note: The provisions of section 3 and 4 of public act 03-215, Prequalification now applies to subcontractors.

Trade or Nature of Work

Business Name and Address W/MBE √

% of Base Bid

Subcontract $ Value

TOTAL SUBCONTRACT VALUE

TOTAL W/MBE SUBCONTRACT VALUE

Subcontract % to total project %

W/MBE Subcontract % to total project %

Additional information may be requested subsequent to your responding to this bid request.






% of Base Bid

Subcontract $ Value











% of Base Bid

Subcontract $ Value








1.5. Bidder’s EEO Status and Report As a condition of doing business with the City the selected respondent must be certified by the City as an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Certifications must be renewed annually. If your firm is not currently certified you may obtain the required forms on-line at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm and submit completed forms with your response. To check the current status of your EEO certification contact the Office of Human Relations, 860.543.8595, fax 860.722.6486 or email: [email protected]. Response Summaries:

Response summaries will be available over the Internet, to those that responded, at http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Home.asp. This summary information will be available anytime after 5:00 PM on the opening date and time. Results will not be provided over the phone.


mailto:[email protected]


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

South End Senior Center Improvements

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for

requirements therein affecting the work of this trade.

1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all

Sections within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.

1.03 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT

A. The General Contractor shall be prime contractor and shall assume all related

responsibilities specified herein and shown on the Contract Documents. B. The work under the contract shall include but not be limited to the following

elements. Refer to all sections of the specifications and all Contract Documents for complete understanding of the scope of work.

1. Obtain all necessary permits. 2. Establish equipment and materials storage areas. 3. Contact and coordinate all work with Building utilities and the City MHIS

Dept. 4. Construct project in accordance with Contract Documents. 5. Perform all punch list items in a timely fashion and complete final cleaning

before turning over the Space. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. The bidders are expected to examine and to be thoroughly familiar with all Contract Documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Owner will not be responsible for errors, omissions and/or charges for extra work arising from General Contractor or Subcontractor’s failure to familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity to examine the site and the contract documents, that he is familiar with the

February 9, 2010 01010 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK


conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work, a given result to be produced, that the contract documents are adequate and that he will produce the required results.

1.05 CONTRACT METHOD

A. Work under this contract shall be one lump sum price, for the scope of work as described in these specifications and shown on the Contract Documents.

1.06 SUMMARY REFERENCE

A. The work can be summarized by reference to requirements of the various contract documents, which in turn make reference to the requirements of other applicable provisions which control or influence the work; and these references can be summarized but not necessarily limited to:

1. Executed Owner-Contractor Agreement bound herewith. 2. General Conditions which are bound herewith. 3. Drawings which are listed on a “List of Drawings” and bound herewith. 4. Specification Sections which are bound herewith. 5. Addenda and Modifications to the Contract Documents which have been

either Bound herewith or distributed by transmittal subsequent to the binding hereof.

6. Governing Regulations which have a bearing on the performance of the work; copies can be obtained from or reviewed at the local, State or Federal Agency responsible for the regulation in each case.

7. Submittals, copies of which are retained by the Contractor at the site. 8. Miscellaneous elements of information having a bearing on performance

of the work, such as weather forecasts and reports of general trace union negotiations; copies must be obtained by the Contractor through normal channels of information.

B. Written Summary: Briefly and without force and effort on the requirements of the

contract documents, the project and the work of the Contract can be described in summary as follows:

1. The Work includes: miscellaneous site work; complete outfitting of second

floor areas, HVAC work throughout and miscellaneous first and third floor alterations.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling his work activities,

and work sequence, to facilitate any simultaneous work of constructing the site. Work shall be fully coordinated to ensure that the contract is completed within the contract completion period established for the project.


South End Senior Center Improvements 1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES / WORK LIMITS

A. The Contractor(s) performing the work for the contract shall have use of the site as identified on the Contract Drawings within the property lines and limit of work lines as indicated on the survey drawings. The exceptions and limitations for use of the site are that the contractor shall remain within the work area limit lines for this project as shown on the Contract Drawings and shall obey all laws within Connecticut. Generally and specifically this includes all work described in this Division 1 Section and all other Sections of this Specification and all other Contract Documents.

1.09 SITE RESTRICTIONS

A. Adhere to lines and limits set forth on the drawings as “Limit of Work Lines”. B. Do not encroach on surrounding areas in any way. Public sidewalks and park

walkways must be kept open, operational and free of construction hazards during construction.

C. Adhere to the provisions of the City of Hartford Noise Ordinance. D. Coordinate all activities with the City of Hartford Representative (Owner’s

Representative), including staging area near the project site and access to the site from Fairfield Avenue. The Owner is willing to work with the Contractor to facilitate site access and use.

1.10 WAGE RATES

A. Davis Bacon Act wage rates shall apply to this project.

1.11 COORDINATION AND INTENT

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for incorporating into his contract bid all necessary work activities, time factors, and cost implications that may occur as a result of coordination activities.

B. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings to call for finished work, ready

for use. Except where otherwise stated in these specifications or on the plans, all materials, equipment, and apparatus shall be new and of first-class quality.

C. Any apparatus, material, or work not shown in the Drawings, but mentioned it he

specifications, or visa versa, or any incidental accessories, or minor details not shown, but necessary to make the work complete in all respects, even if not particularly specified, shall be provided by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner.

D. The locations of all items shown on the drawings or called for in the

specifications that are not definitely fixed by dimensions are approximate only.



The exact locations necessary to secure the best conditions and result must be determined at the project and shall have the approval of the Owner’s Representative before being installed. Do not scale drawings.

1.12 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines and levels, by use of

recognized engineering survey practices. Survey layout and control shall be performed by a Connecticut Licensed Land Surveyor or Engineer.

1.13 LAWS, ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, file all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all required Certificates of Inspection for his work and deliver same to Owner’s Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for work.

1. Fees for all permits, which are issued by the City of Hartford Public

Works and/or Licenses and Inspections, are waived except for the fee to be paid to Licenses and Inspections for the State Educations Fee of $0.22 per $1,000.00 and a general permit fee of $25.

B. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to Owner, any labor,

materials, services, apparatus, drawings, (in addition to contract drawings and documents) in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

C. All materials furnished and all work installed shall comply with the rules and

recommendations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, with all requirements of Local Utility companies, with the recommendations of Fire Insurance Rating organization having jurisdiction, and with requirements of all governmental departments having jurisdiction.

1.14 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the bid date, except when a

specific date is specified.

1.15 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Project meetings shall be held on a basis subject to the discretion of the Owner and/or Owner’s Representative.


South End Senior Center Improvements 1.16 PERMITS, INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES

A. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the work to be inspected, tested or approved, the General Contractor shall give the Owner’s Representative and such Authority timely notice of its readiness so the Owner’s Representative may observe such inspection and testing.

B. Prior to the start of construction, the General Contractor shall complete

application to the applicable Building Code enforcement authority for a building permit. Such permit shall be displayed in a conspicuous location at the project site.

C. General Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the acquisition of and

compliance with all fees and permits required for the work, unless otherwise provided for herein.

1.17 CUTTING. CORING, PATCHING. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED

A. The General Contractor shall do all cutting, coring, fitting and patching of his

work that may he required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of Subcontractors shown upon all Contract Documents and Specifications.

B. Expense caused by defective or ill timed work shall be borne by party

responsible at no additional expense to the Owner. C. The General Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, coring,

excavating, or otherwise altering the work and shall not cut or alter the work of any or other Subcontractor without the consent of the Resident Engineer.

D. Where field cutting and coring are authorized or directed, the General Contractor

shall provide adequate reinforcement of the weakened area in such form as is approved by the Resident Engineer.

1.18 DEBRIS REMOVAL

A. The Contractor shall remove all debris from the job site on a daily basis. B. Contractor shall not store debris or stockpile materials that in any way restrict

the use of driveway or dwelling to the property. The Contractor shall immediately remove any materials from storage locations if requested to do so by the Owner or Owner’s Representative. Such moves shall be made at the sole expense of the Contractor.

1.19 FIELD MEASUREMENTS



A. Although care has been taken to ensure their accuracy, the dimensions shown for existing items and structures are not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to verify these dimensions in the field before fabricating any construction component. No claims for extra payment due to incorrect dimensions will be considered.

B. The General Contractor shall take responsibility for determining means and

methods necessary to schedule and install materials and equipment in the proper locations. No additional compensation will be allowed for partial demolition and subsequent patching necessary to install large or ill-timed equipment.

1.20 SUPERVISION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall be held directly responsible for the correct installation of all work performed under this Contract. He must make good repair, without expense to the Owner of any part of the work which may become inoperative on account of leaving the work unprotected or unsupervised during the construction of the system or which may break or give out in any manner by reason of poor workmanship, defective materials or any lack of space to allow for expansion, contraction of the work during a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work by the Owner.

1.21 SAFETY REGULATIONS

A. These Contract Documents, and the construction hereby contemplated shall be governed at all times by applicable provision of all Federal and State laws.

1.22 PHASING AND PRIORITIES

A. Attention is drawn to the interlocking nature of much of the Work. General Contractor shall have the responsibility for coordinating the scheduling and sequencing of all of the work.

B. Pay careful attention to work scheduling and give careful thought to the

sequencing of the work so that all work is performed expeditiously in the appropriate order. Demonstrate on a construction schedule how related work is to be phased.

C. To expedite construction progress on this project, the General Contractor shall

order all material immediately after the approval of Shop Drawings and shall obtain a fixed date of delivery to the project site for all materials ordered which shall not impede or otherwise interfere with construction progress.


South End Senior Center Improvements 1.23 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY

A. The General Contractor shall save the Owner harmless from all claims arising from the use of public streets, sidewalks, and adjoining property for construction purposes.

B. Keep all access roads and walks clear of debris, materials, construction plant

and equipment during site operation. Repair all elements and the like where disturbed by site operation and leave them in as good condition after completion of the work as before operation started.

C. Protect everything on the premises from injury by water, frost, wind, fire,

accident or other cause, and any interference. D. Provide ways and means to control the flow of water from every source that may

cause inconvenience or damage during the building operation.

1.24 EXISTING UTILITIES/DIG-SAFE NOTIFICATION

A. Contractor shall notify public and private utility companies as required by law in advance of construction so that existing utilities may be accurately located and identified by the appropriate agency or utility. Comply with the requirements of the “Dig Safe” number notes on the Drawings.

1.25 TIME LIMIT

A. The following schedule shall apply to the work of this Contractor: construction period - 120 calendar days.

1.26 CONSTRUCTION SIGN

A. The Contractor shall erect one Construction Sign as directed by the City. The proposed text and face of sign shall be approved by the City. Contractor shall submit a sign shop drawing image of sign. Sign size shall be 6’ x8’.

1. City of Hartford 2. Mayor Eddie Perez 3. City Seal 4. South End Senior Center Improvements 5. Name of Contractor 6. Name of Consultant

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.




PART 3 EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01020

ALLOWANCES PART 1 GENERAL


A. The General Documents, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included in and made a part of this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for

requirements therein affecting the work of this trade. 1.02 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all

Sections within DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications.

1.03 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

1. A Contingency Allowance is hereby established. In all cases, this

allowance includes installation if applicable. Allowance has been established in lieu of additional requirements. Additional requirements will be issued by Contingency Authorization (CA).

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Contingency Allowance.

1.04 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Owner’s Representative for

Owner’s purposes and only by Contingency Authorizations that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

B. Contractor’s overhead, profit and related costs for products and equipment

ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.

C. Contingency Authorizations authorizing use of funds from the contingency

allowance will include Contractor’s related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.

February 9, 2010 01020 - 1 ALLOWANCES


February 9, 2010 01020 - 2 ALLOWANCES

D. At Project Closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency

allowance to Owner by Change Order.

E. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Owner’s Representative for Owner’s purposes and only by Contingency Authorizations that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or

defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related

materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.03 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Contingency Allowance: Include $40,000 (forty thousand dollars) as a

contingency allowance for this project.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01100

ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The following list of variations of construction and/or materials to the project represent alternate design choices which will be reviewed from a cost deduct/add viewpoint upon receipt of the bids. The effected contractor shall bid all alternates which relate to his work in order to be considered as a viable bidder.

B. The title of the Alternate shall be used for general reference purposes only and

shall not be interpreted to define the scope of the alternate in any way. C. The scope of any requested Alternate shall be determined by a thorough

reference to all elements of the contract documents taken as a whole and not in part. If any discrepancy or confusion in the scope or provisions of the contract documents, or any Alternate requested, is encountered by the Contractor it will be the Contractor's responsibility to bring that to the attention of the Owner for resolution prior to submittal of the bid and award of the Contract. After award of the contract the Owner's Architect and/or Engineer will be the sole and final interpreter of the provisions of the Contract Documents including any Alternates taken by the Owner.

1.02 ALTERNATES

A. ALTERNATE #1

1. Add to the Base Contract Sum the cost to replace existing spandrel glass with clear glass at the upper portions of the Second Floor windows and portions of the Third Floor windows as shown on drawings D-1 and A-1. Glass thickness and color shall match the existing lower portion glass. R values of new glass shall meet current code requirements.

B. ALTERNATE #2

1. Add to the Base Contract Sum the cost to clean the entire side (north) and rear (east) parking lot areas. Remove debris and vegetation, clean all cracks and potholes and fill with new asphalt. Restripe all areas with yellow lines and blue handicap accessible signage using DOT standards and graphics as shown on drawing SP-1. Number every parking stall as indicated using font and size as approved by Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used.

February 9, 2010 01100 - 1 ALTERNATES


February 9, 2010 01100 - 2 ALTERNATES

PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE REMOVALS & DEMOLITION

PAGE 1 of 2

02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS #09205

PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of Work

Removal and demolition of selected items from selected exterior and interior areas of the building; items to be removed include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 All items as shown on the demolition drawings.

1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS

Not applicable. 1 .03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit a schedule indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective removals and demolition work prior to commencement of operations. Include details for dust and noise control operation. Provide a detailed sequence of removals and demolition work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Services.

1 .04 RESPONSIBILITY, PROTECTION, DAMAGES, RESTRICTIONS

A. Condition of the space

The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual conditions of the buildings and site in which removals and demolition work is performed.

B. Protections

Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection required to protect the building and in general public from injury due to selective removals and demolition work.

1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of any

person involved in the construction operations.

2. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and which becomes exposed during operations.

C. Damages

Promptly repair any and all damages to all property and finishes caused by the removals and demolition work; to the Owner’s satisfaction and at not extra cost to the owner.

D. Explosives:

The use of explosives is prohibited.

E. Power - driven tools (for removals): Only hand -held electric power-driven tools shall be used to cut.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to commencing of the selective removals and demolition work, inspect the areas in which the work is to be performed. Determine and list the existing conditions of the area's surfaces and equipment. After the work in each respective area is completed, determine if adjacent surfaces or equipment have been damaged as a result of the work; if so, the damage shall be corrected at the contractor's expense.

SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE REMOVALS & DEMOLITION

PAGE 2 of 2


3.02 REMOVALS AND DEMOLITION WORK

A. Perform selective demolition working in a systematic manner and use such methods as required to complete the work in accordance with the requirements and specifications of the city, state, and federal regulations.

3.03 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS

A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from the removal and demolition from the building immediately; transport and legally dispose of materials off-site. Disposal method shall be in accordance with city, state, and federal regulations.

B. Burning of removal materials is not permitted in the job site.

3.04 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of removals and demolition work, remove tools, equipment and all remaining demolished materials from the site.

B. Repair all damaged areas caused by the removals and demolition work. Repair adjacent

construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.

C. All areas in which work was performed under this section shall be left “broom clean ".

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 1 of 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and General Requirements

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,

placement procedures, and finishes. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:

1. Foundations and footings for the exterior canopy.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming

accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect.

C. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as

follows: 1. Vapor retarder/barrier.

D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect.

Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and

standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."

B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency acceptable to Architect to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of

Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. Sonotube forms are acceptable

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS


SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 2 of 7

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing,

supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base

material will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete. C. Water: Potable.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. B. Vapor Barrier: Premolded seven-ply membrane consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet

with fortified bitumen layers, protective weathercoating, and plastic antistick sheet. Water vapor transmission rate of 1 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96, Method B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mastics and gusset tape.

C. Bonding agent: Liquid or semi-liquid chemical aggregate to be applied to existing concrete.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15

days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.

B. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on

drawings and schedules: 1. 3500 psi 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio, 0.44 maximum (non-air-

entrained), 0.35 maximum (air-entrained). C. Water-Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water-cement

(W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.

D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as

follows: 1. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches

E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

F. Fiber Reinforcement: Add at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.



1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials

with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral,

static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 1. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.

B. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of

other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

C. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.

Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with

direction of pour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive

tape. 1. Cover vapor retarder/barrier with sand cushion and compact to depth indicated.

3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing

Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement

and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or

destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection.

Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full

mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.


SECTION 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAGE 4 of 7 3.5 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or

appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints between walls and footings.

3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required

for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.

3.7 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating

compound before placing reinforcement. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing

steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed

on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24

inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-

spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.

E. Placing Concrete Footings and Piers: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous

operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a section.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to

below 90 deg F Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.

3.09 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS



A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other

trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Leveling. Level all existing concrete plank floors with cement mortar, to the highest elevation or

within a tolerance of one (1) inch between points. Prior application of mixture, clean existing plank substrate thoroughly to remove coatings, floor adhesives, dust and any organic material or not, that might be incompatible with the bonding agent and concrete mixture; then apply bonding agent in areas with square footage not to exceed the quantities recommended by the manufacturer before applying the cement mortar mixture for leveling.

3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing

and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with

water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other

flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,

unless otherwise directed. 3.12 REMOVING FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,

and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately

after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect. B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate

passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left

by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for



smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's

durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through no reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop outs, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

D. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using

specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.

3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following,

as directed by Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM

C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each

type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below, when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of

concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd. Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.




4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi

C. Test results will be reported in writing to Owner, Architect, ready-mix producer, and Contractor

within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

END OF SECTION 03300

SECTION 03610 GROUTING PAGE 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Furnish material, equipment, labor, services required to provide non-shrink grout. Work includes, but is not limited to grouting filling of posts and rail posts sleeves, and wherever else shown on Drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete.....................................................................................Section 03300 1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, latest editions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

Submit manufacturer's information on the non-shrink grout. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications

Company Specializing in performing the work of this section shall have three years minimum experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect material from the elements and from other damage at site.

B. Replace and pay for material and work damaged to the satisfaction of the Hospital. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement temperatures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Grout

1. US Grout Corp., Old Greenwich, Connecticut 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Grout

1. Grout shall be non-shrink, made from factory-premixed material containing no corrosive irons, aluminums, or gypsums, with the following properties:

a. Non-shrink from time of mixing ...........ASTM C827

No expansion after set..........................ASTM C827 Initial set time........................................ASTM C191 Compressive Strength..........................ASTM C109

b. An effective bearing area (EBA) of 95 to 100 percent.

c. Grout that contains water reducers, accelera-tors or fluidifiers shall have no drying

shrinkage greater than the equivalent sand cement and water mix as tested under ASTM C596.

2. The grout shall not shrink below its placement volume and shall not expand after set. Grout

SECTION 03610 GROUTING PAGE 2 of 2


shall have a 1-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi and a minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi in 28 days.

3. Grout shall have a initial setting time of not less than 45 minutes.

4. Products:

1. "Five Star Grout" by U.S. Grout Corp. 2. SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine all adjoining work on which this Work is in anyway dependent for proper installation and workmanship. Report to the Hospital any conditions which prevents the performance of this Work.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Concrete surface shall be free of all loose material.

B. Steel shall be clean and free of corrosion.

C. Surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, loose paint, corrosive deposits, dust, laitance and other contaminants.

D. Sleeves and holes shall be clean of dust and debris. 3.03 APPLICATION

A. Perform all grouting in accordance with the recommendations of ACI, CSI, and the grout manufacturer’s published specifications for site preparation, product mixing, and placing. For grouting in weather below 50oF, contact manufacturer for cold weather instructions.

B. Arrange with the manufacturer of the grout for the services of a qualified field representative to

instruct the work crews in the mixing of components, preparation of surfaces, technique of installation, and inspection procedures. The representative shall remain at the job site after work commences until the representative is satisfied that the grout is being installed correctly.

C. Locations

1. Provide grout wherever else it is indicated on Drawings or Specifications.

D. Follow manufacturer's instructions for curing.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Clean all adjacent area of excess material and clean all floors and walls of powder and droppings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The City will inspect the grouting procedure and take cube specimens to test compressive strength.

B. The City will inspect and reject any that contains cracks or other defects. These areas shall be fixed at contractor's expense.

END OF SECTION

04810 UNIT MASONRY PAGE 1of 10 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Brick unit masonry. 2. Masonry waste disposal.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 7 Section 07620 Metal Flushing and Trim Section 07920 Joint Sealers

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include the following:

1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors installed under Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place

Concrete." 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame

installed under Division5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following:

1. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry specified in Division6 Section "Rough

Carpentry." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing specified in Division7 Section

"Flashing and Sheet Metal." 3. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings specified in Division8 Section "Standard

Steel Doors and Frames." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm) at 28

days. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: As follows, based on net area:

a. f'm = 1900 psi

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product

specified. C. Samples for initial selection of the following:

1. Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures

available for each different exposed masonry unit required. D. Samples for verification of the following:

1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing the full range of

exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. a. Include size-variation data for Type FBX and Type FBS brick, verifying that actual

range of sizes for brick falls within ASTM C216 dimension tolerances. 2. Accessories embedded in the masonry.

2/9/10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS #09205

04810 UNIT MASONRY PAGE 2of 10

F. Material certificates for the following, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that

each material complies with requirements. 1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of

manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 2. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 3. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Owner will employ and pay a qualified professional engineer to provide a survey and inspection

of foundations for compliance with dimensional tolerances if deemed necessary B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those

of assemblies with fire resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one source and by a single manufacturer for each different product required.

D. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform

quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.

E. Mockup: Prior to installing unit masonry, construct sample wall panels to verify selections

made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as other qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 1. Locate mockups on site in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect. 2. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

a. Include exterior face brick wall with window opening and stone trim units.

3. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches long

by 48 inches high by full thickness, including face and back-up wythes as well as accessories.

4. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner indicated. 5. Where masonry is to match existing, erect panels adjacent and parallel to existing

surface. 6. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 7. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 8. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work. a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and



contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes,

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least

3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold-Weather Construction: When the ambient temperature is within the limits

indicated, use the following procedures: a. 40 to 32 degF Heat mixing water or sand to produce mortar temperatures

between 40 and 120 degF b. 32 to 25 degF Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures

between 40 and 120 degF Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 degF Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry.

c. 25 to 20 degF Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degF Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 degF Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 degF if grouting. Use heat on both sides of walls under construction.

d. 20 degF and Below: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degF Heat grout materials to produce grout temperatures between 40 and 120 degF Maintain mortar and grout above freezing until used in masonry. Heat masonry units to 40 degF Provide enclosures and use heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain temperatures above 32 degF within the enclosures.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity

conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 degF and above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1. Brick:

a. Manufacturer providing brick matching existing brick in texture and color.

2. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime:

a. Essroc Materials, Inc. b. Glen-Gery Corporation. c. Lafarge Corporation. d. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.



e. Riverton Corporation (The). 3. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors:

a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

2.2 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required.

1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills

and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces.

B. Face Brick: ASTM C216 and as follows:

1. Grade and Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with grade and minimum average

net-area compressive strength indicated below: a. Grade: SW. b. 3000 psi

2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Between 5 and 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per

ASTM C67. 3. Size: Bricks manufactured to match existing dimensions within tolerances specified in

ASTM C216: 4. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color, texture, and size of

existing adjacent brickwork. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, TypeI or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, TypeS. C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. D. Water: Potable.

2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following:

1. Galvanized carbon-steel wire, coating class as follows:

a. ASTM A641 Class1, for interior walls; and ASTM A153, ClassB-2, for exterior

walls. B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain

cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch

C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:

1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.

D. For multiwythe masonry, provide type as follows:

1. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.


04810 UNIT MASONRY PAGE 5of 10 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with

requirements for metal and size of this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wire: As follows:

1. Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A82; with ASTM A153, Class B-2 coating.

C. Steel Sheet: As follows:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A526, G60 (commercial quality), steel sheet zinc coated

by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication, for sheet-metal ties and anchors in interior walls and in exterior walls when completely embedded in mortar.

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: For steel sheet hot-dip galvanized by continuous process

prior to fabrication: 1. 0.0635 inch

2.6 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STRUCTURAL FRAME

A. General: Provide 2-piece assemblies as described below, allowing vertical or horizontal

differential movement between wall and frame parallel to plane of wall but resisting tension and compression forces perpendicular to it. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with dovetail

anchor section formed from sheet metal and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch

2. For anchorage to steel framing, provide manufacturer's standard anchors with crimped

1/4-inch- diameter wire anchor section for welding to steel and triangular-shaped wire tie section sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face and as follows: a. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron inserts of type and size indicated. B. Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots with filler strips, of slot size indicated, fabricated from

0.0336-inch galvanized steel sheet. C. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, GradeA with ASTM A563 hex nuts and,

where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A153, ClassC; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Nonheaded bolts, bent in manner indicated.

2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below:

1. Copper-Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight indicated below, bonded with asphalt

between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. a. Weight: 5 oz./sq. ft.

B. Solder and Sealants for Sheet-Metal Flashings: As specified in Division7 Section "Flashing and

Sheet Metal." C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



1. Copper-Fabric Laminate Flashing: a. Copper Fabric; AFCO Products, Inc. b. TypeFCC-Fabric Covered Copper; Phoenix Building Products. c. Copper Fabric Flashing; Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. York Copper Fabric Flashing; York Manufacturing, Inc.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Type2, ClassA,

Grade1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from the following material: 1. Neoprene.

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, Type

I (No.15 asphalt felt). 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of

mortar indicated below: C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with BIAM1, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar

indicated below: 1. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls;

for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use type indicated below: a. Type: N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not

otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension, unless

otherwise indicated. E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's

directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior

to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units

as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units



without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arrises, do not

exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal

grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor 1/16 inch within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns,

walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions

shown, do not exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus 1/2 inch E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed-joint thickness indicated by more

than plus or minus 1/8 inch with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch Do not vary bed-joint thickness from bed-joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch Do not vary from head-joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch Do not vary head-joint thickness from adjacent head-joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch Do not vary from collar-joint thickness indicated by more than minus 1/4 inch or plus 3/8 inch

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths

and for accurate locating of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.

B. Lay walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and

coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not

use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses

above and below. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2-unit length for one-half running

bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified under this and other

Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise

indicated. 1. At exterior frames, insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of

frame in thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4 inch to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry.

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,



lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof

structure above and as follows: 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns,

and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed,

including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond

alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch joints. B. Set stone units in full bed of mortar with vertical joints slushed full. Fill dowel, anchor, and

similar holes solid. Wet stone-joint surface thoroughly before setting; for stone surfaces that are soiled, clean bedding and exposed surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear water.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width.

3.6 CAVITIES

A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints

facing cavities flush. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal-joint reinforcing.

3.7 HORIZONTAL-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Provide continuous horizontal-joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length

of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches beyond opening. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.

Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to

comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural

member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches



o.c. horizontally. 3.9 LINTELS

A. Install hot dip galvanized steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick size

units and 24 inches for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color,

texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcement bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method as CMU.

C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,

other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture

flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar.

C. Install flashing as follows:

1. At composite masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of

outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 16 inches and through the inner wythe to within 1/2 inch of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form a pan.

D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry

immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with product specified in Part2 of this Section.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Mortar properties will be tested per property specification of ASTM C270. B. Mortar composition and properties will be evaluated per ASTM C780. C. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C1019. D. Prism-Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated, masonry prisms will be tested

per ASTM E447, Method B, and as follows: 1. Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for testing at 28 days.

E. Evaluation of Quality-Control Tests: In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, masonry will be considered satisfactory if results from construction quality-control tests comply with minimum requirements indicated.

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.




B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove

mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape

hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No.20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner: a. Job-mixed detergent solution.

6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMATEK8-2 applicable to type

of stain present on exposed surfaces. 7. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in the "Indiana Limestone

Handbook" of the Indiana Limestone Institute of America. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units,

waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts specified fill material for each part masonry

waste. Fill material is specified in Division2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as

described above, and other masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PAGE 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Requirements and Division1

Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Aluminum pipe and tube handrails and railings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division5 Section "Ornamental Handrails and Railings" for ornamental metal handrails and railings

fabricated from stock components. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In engineering handrails and railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine

allowable design working stresses of handrail and railing materials based on the following: 1. Structural Steel: AISC S335, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design

and Plastic Design with Commentary." B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with

requirements of ASTME985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTME894 and ASTME935.

C. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding

structural loads required by ASCE7 without exceeding allowable design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections.

D. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of withstanding

the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections: 1. Top Rail of Guards: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated:

a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100

lbf/ft. applied vertically downward. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Handrails Not Serving As Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as

indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill Area of Guards: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied

to 1 sq. ft. at any point in system, including panels, intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing infill area. a. Load above need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails in determining

stress on guard. E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and

other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans, elevations,

sections, component details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed handrails and railings indicated to comply with design loads, include structural

analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of handrails and railings that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTME548. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of handrail and railing through one source from a single

manufacturer. 1.6 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weather tight place.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before fabrication

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not support

temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements. 2.2 METALS

A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other

imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum: Provide struded aluminum in the form indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Aluminum : ASTM A53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:

a. Anodized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. b. Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and

weight are required by structural loads.

C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as

recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade,



and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. For handrails, railings, and fittings, use plated fasteners complying with ASTMB633, ClassFe/Zn

25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from same

basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cast-in-Place and Post installed Anchors: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-

resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry, as determined by testing per ASTME488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.4 PAINT

A. Use anodized aluminum bronze color to match the existing at the new entrance doors and c anopy

supports. 2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:

1. By bending.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

E. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members by welding. Cope

components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows

after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. F. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or masonry

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

H. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. I. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal

corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap components, as indicated, to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar



items. K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of

returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less. L. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided

floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations

for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if

they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of handrails and

railings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine concrete slabs, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed

reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings

accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that have been coated or

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps

and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,

masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space

posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing

handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply

with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

3.4 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS

A. Anchor railing ends into concrete with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored into wall

construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.



3.5 CLEANING A. Clean railings by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period with temporary

protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PAGE 1 OF 3


PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Sheathing.

B. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and furring.

C. All fastening devices required.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for materials listed below.

1. Plywood sheathing.

B. Material Certificates: Submit listing of species and grade selected for dimensional lumber, and

submit a signed copy of lumber producer's grading rules showing design values for selected species and grade. Design values shall comply with specified requirements and American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC).

C. Wood Treatment Data: Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,

storing, installation and finishing of treated material.

1. Preservative Treatment: For each type specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained and conformance with applicable standards.

a. For water-borne treatment include statement that moisture content of treated

materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to project site. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other items; providing for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with water-borne chemicals, sticker between each

course to provide air circulation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of rough carpentry and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work.

1.05 WORKMANSHIP

A. General: All workmanship shall be of the highest grade. Adequate provisions shall be made for the expansion of woodwork, as detailed, and approved by the Architect. The finished work shall not show any warping, splits or open joints.

1.06 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. General: The following standards apply to this work as minimum requirements:

1. Hardwoods: U.S. Commercial Standards CS 35-61.

2. Softwoods: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

3. Plywood: American Plywood Association. Plywood shall have the APA label affixed thereon.

4. Grade Marking: American Lumber Standards Committee in conformity with Department of Commerce R16-53..

5. National Forest Products Association, "National Design Specification for Wood



Construction", latest edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL

A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber

grades and species include the following:

APA - American Plywood Association NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB- West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA- Western Wood Products Association.

C. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency

evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required

by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide season lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows.

B. Moisture Content: 19% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative

treatment.

C. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of kiln dried or air seasoned Douglas Fir species. Board size lumber as required. No 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules.

D. Roof Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING, B-B.

a. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR, preservative treated, 3/4" thick, unless otherwise noted.

b. Span Rating: As required to suit rafter spacing indicated.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails.

1. All attachment metal shall be ASTM A 36 steel.

2. All fasteners and attachment metal for rough carpentry to be hot-dip galvanized coating

(after fabrication); ASTM A 153, at exterior or exposed locations use stainless steel fasteners, Type 302/304.

B. Building Paper (non-permeable): ASTM D226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, 15-lb.

type.



2.06 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS

A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.

1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPB

LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber to 19% and plywood to 15% maximum moisture content. Treat the following:

a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, sleepers and similar members in

connection with roofing, flashing and decking

b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after

treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and

fitted.

C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards.

D. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to

view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, AND BLOCKING

A. Provide where shown for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with

surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Where possible, anchor to concrete and masonry during their installation.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than

1-1/2" wide and of thickness to match finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.03 ROUGH LUMBER FOR ROOFING

A. Furnish and install all wood nailing strips and wood blocking required in connection with respective types of roofing, flashing and sheet metal work, using preservative treated work as hereinbefore specified.

B. Wood blocking shall be of sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PAGE 1 of 6



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cabinets. 2. Countertops. 3. Closets shelves.


1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing

woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, finishing

materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,

attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking

and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers

indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 5. Apply WIC-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing

the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated.

1. Acrylic-based premium solid surface such as Corian by DuPont

D. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Corian, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with

separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 2. Corner pieces as follows:

a. Cabinet front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as exposed end pieces, 18

inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim.

3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply

with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their



capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for

production [and installation] of interior architectural woodwork . D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality

Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program certificate indicating that woodwork complies with

requirements of grades specified. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide

materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1

Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been

completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is

complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is

complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of

other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,

establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of

Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.



B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section

"Door Hardware " to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of

woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Bamboo Plywood 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3 Wheat Board 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.

C. Synthetic Counter Tops. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the

same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-

pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Du Pont b. Laminart. c. Pioneer Plastics Corp. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

D. Adhesive for Bonding no containing Urea Formaldehyde

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets,

except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or

items referenced to this standard. C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick

metal, and as follows: 1. Semi concealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semi concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inches (8 mm) in diameter. F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. H. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013. I. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings,

BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf (330 N). 2. File Drawer Slides: 150 lbf (670 N).



J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for

BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class

requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15

percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less

than 15 percent moisture content. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced

quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture

content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation area. C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the

following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or

Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before

shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be

complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install

dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures,

electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 Bamboo Plywood Cabinets

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Premium.



C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the

following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 3. Edges: HGS.

E. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Plyboo Finishes 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of

exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from lmanufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the

following categories: a. Solid colors with core same color as surface.

G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and

drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.6 Synthetic Counter Tops

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section requirements for Solid countertops. B. Grade: Premium.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of

exposed surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following

categories: a. Solid colors with core same color as surface.

E. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. F. Edge Treatment: As required by the architect G. Core Material: Synthetic

2.7 CLOSETS SHELVES

Harwood solid lumber for shelves, sealed with a natural clear sealent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete

work as required, including removal of packing and back priming. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in

Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.



B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade specified in Part

2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level

and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at

cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately

aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other

variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches

(400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into

underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before

installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.

I. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;

where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore

damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION

07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PAGE 1 OF 7



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed and exposed sprayed fire-resistive materials. 2. Sealer.


1. Division9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for fire-resistance-rated ceiling assemblies. 2. Division9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for fire-resistance-rated ceiling assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Concealed sprayed fire-resistive material is applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind

other construction when the Work is completed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fire-resistive product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying sprayed fire-resistive

material. 2. Extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including

the following: a. Applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of structural

components and assemblies. c. Designation of restrained and unrestrained conditions based on definitions in ASTME119,

AppendixX3 as determined by a qualified professional engineer. 3. Treatment of sprayed fire-resistive material after application.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of sprayed fire-resistive material certifying that the

products furnished comply with requirements. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified

requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their

capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For primers and other coatings applied to structural steel.

Provide reports from a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor. Confirm that primers and coatings proposed for application in shop or field are compatible with fire-resistive material. Instruct laboratory to determine compatibility according to requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Product Test Reports: Indicate that physical properties of proposed sprayed fire-resistive materials

comply with specified requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations by a qualified testing and inspecting agency according to requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of sprayed fire-resistive material's compliance with building



code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by

sprayed fire-resistive material manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed fire-resistive materials to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the

jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of sprayed fire-resistive materials that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspecting agency with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work, as documented according to ASTME699.

D. Testing of Fire-Resistive Materials: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor

or manufacturer according to the following requirements: 1. Sprayed fire-resistive materials are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the

applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Testing is performed on specimens of sprayed fire-resistive materials that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water over spray, if any of these are used in final application.

3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.

E. Testing for Compatibility and Adhesion: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to prepare

compatibility and adhesion test reports required in "Submittals" Article based on testing that complies with the following requirements: 1. Testing for bond per ASTME736 and requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"

about coating materials. 2. Verify that manufacturer of fire-resistive material has not found primers or coatings to be

incompatible with fire-resistive material based on its own laboratory testing or field experience. F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sprayed fire-resistive material from one source and by a single

manufacturer. G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials and assemblies identical to

those tested for the following fire-test-response characteristics per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify packages (bags) containing sprayed fire-resistive material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to fire-resistive designs listed in UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory," or in the comparable publication of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for sprayed fire-resistive material serving as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTME119.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed fire-resistive product required, tested per ASTME84.

H. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in

40CFR, Part763, SubpartE, AppendixE, Section1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers'

labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.



B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard

materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove

from Project site and discard materials that have deteriorated. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply sprayed fire-resistive material when ambient or substrate

temperatures are 40degF or lower, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fire-resistive material. Use

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire-resistive materials with other related work specified

in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosures for interior applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive

material due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions. 2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to

occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 3. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been

completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. 4. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other

items penetrating fire protection are in place. 5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive

material until application of fire protection is completed. 6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been

applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to defective applications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: For concealed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's standard

products complying with requirements indicated in this Article for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products.

B. Material Composition: As follows:

1. Cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material consisting of factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum

or portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortarfor conveyance and application.

2. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain

designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed as follows: 1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in

referenced fire-resistive design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTME605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, AppendixA, "Alternate Method for Density Determination."

2. Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for fire-resistive design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375inch per ASTME605. a. Where the referenced fire-resistive design lists a thickness of 1 inch or greater, the

minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch

b. Where the referenced fire-resistive design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fire-resistive



material is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness. c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistive designs whose fire-

resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft. 3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. per ASTME736 under the following conditions:

a. Field test sprayed fire-resistive material that is applied to flanges of wide-flange

structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.

b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed fire-resistive material are primed or otherwise painted, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials.

c. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested in laboratory shall be 0.75 inch

4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. as determined in the laboratory per ASTME761. Minimum

thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft.

5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTME937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTME759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination, or the like per ASTME760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTME859. For laboratory

tests, minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is 0.75 inch maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft. test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the following surface-

burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTME84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 10 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 0. 3. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTMG21. 1. Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material:

a. Pyrolite 15; Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div. b. Pyrolite 15 Blue; Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div. c. Monokote Type MK-6/CBF; W.R. Grace & Co.--Conn., Construction Products Div. d. Monokote Type MK-6/ED; W.R. Grace & Co.--Conn., Construction Products Div. e. Retro-Gard; W.R. Grace & Co.--Conn., Construction Products Div. f. Cafco 280; Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products. g. Cafco 300; Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products. h. Cafco 300 SB; Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products. i. Mandolite CP2; Mandoval Vermiculite Products, Inc. j. 5EF; Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc. k. 5GP; Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.

2.2 EXPOSED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: For exposed applications of sprayed fire-resistive materials, provide manufacturer's standard

products complying with requirements indicated for material composition and for minimum physical properties of each product listed, measured by standard test methods referenced with each property.

B. Cementitious Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation, for

medium density fire proofing shall be minimum of 51% Portland cement by weight, chloride-free formulation of gypsum or Portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates, mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application, complying with the following requirements:

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the following surface-

burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTME84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 10 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 0. 3. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTMG21.



4. Mould resistance as per ASTM E1513 2.3 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with sprayed fire-resistive

materials and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistive designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product, provide

primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"

for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTME736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics of

sprayed fire-resistive material per ASTME119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of sprayed fire-

resistive material. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required

to comply with fire-resistive designs indicated and fire-resistive product manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive sprayed fire-resistive material.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine whether they are in satisfactory condition to

receive sprayed fire-resistive material. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials

and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt,

or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive material with substrate under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.

B. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that

substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, and other substances capable of interfering with bond. C. Do not proceed with installation of fire-resistive material until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including oil, grease,

rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer, unless

compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fire-resistive material.

C. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during

application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and ensure maintenance of adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application



procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

B. Apply sprayed fire-resistive material that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 in "Product

Test Reports" in "Submittals" Article, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results.

C. Install metal lath, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and fire-resistive material

manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach lath to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer. Attach lathing accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment to substrate.

D. Coat substrates with adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-

resistance rating or as recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer for material and application indicated.

E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless

otherwise recommended in writing by fire-resistive material manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.

F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in

each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by manufacturer.

G. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from the sprayed fire-

resistive material over which they are applied. 3.4 INSTALLING CONCEALED SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Apply concealed fire-resistive material in thicknesses and densities indicated, but not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, and comply with requirements for thickness specified in Part 2 "Concealed Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials" Article.

B. Apply sealer to concealed sprayed fire-resistive material where indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform

field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work

complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing and inspecting of completed applications of sprayed fire-resistive material will take place in

successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of fire-resistive material for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fire-resistive material show compliance with requirements. 1. Extent: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, testing and inspecting agency

will evaluate the following characteristics. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and values required for approved fire-resistance design. a. Thickness for Floors, Roofs, and Walls: From the average of 10 measurements from a

144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTME605. b. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural

members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for joists and trusses and 7 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTME605.

c. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction, per ASTME605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, AppendixA, "Alternate Method for Density Determination."

d. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: Cohesion and adhesion at frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction, per ASTME736.



2. When testing discovers applications of fire-resistive material not in compliance with

requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.

C. Remove and replace applications of fire-resistive material where test results indicate that they do not

comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for density, or both. D. Apply additional fire-resistive material per manufacturer's written instructions where E. test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove

material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Cure exposed cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material according to product manufacturer's written

recommendations to prevent premature drying. C. Protect fire-resistive material, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage

resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

D. Coordinate application of fire-resistive material with other construction to minimize the need to cut or

remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fire-resistive material and patch any damaged or removed areas.

E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.

END OF SECTION

07841 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PAGE 1 OF 6



Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the

following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items: 1. Floors. 2. Roofs. 3. Walls and partitions.


1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for construction of openings in concrete slabs

and walls. 2. Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 3. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are

produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated

openings. 2. Fire-resistance-rated non-load-bearing walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-

rated openings. 3. Fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. 4. Fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies.

B. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as

determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems

with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch- (100-mm-) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in.

(100 sq. cm) in overall cross-sectional area. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical

damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-

resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and

exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting



PAGE 2 OF 6

floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop

systems not requiring removal of insulation. E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread

ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop

system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration

firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is qualified by having the necessary

experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration

and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply

with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:. a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference

to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1. UL in "Fire Resistance Directory."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and



PAGE 3 OF 6

inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient

or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by

natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

through-penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop

system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed

behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings Corp. 7. Isolatek International. 8. Nelson Firestop Products. 9. NUCO Industries. 10. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 11. Specified Technologies Inc. 12. 3M Fire Protection Products. 13. Tremco. 14. United States Gypsum Company.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one

another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed

to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include,



PAGE 4 OF 6

but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials

indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during

exposure to moisture. D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum

foil on one side. H. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,

fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing

elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other



PAGE 5 OF 6

surfaces. 2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration

firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.


A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces

capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop

system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from

contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support

fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other

accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.



PAGE 6 OF 6


3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect

through-penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports. 1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through-penetration

firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements. B. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued. C. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they

comply with requirements. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted

vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure

through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.


07920 JOINT SEALERS PAGE 1 of 9 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Requirements and Division

1, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by

reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum

board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of

acoustical ceilings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous

joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-

resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint

sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. E. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's

Sealant Validation Program. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information


07920 JOINT SEALERS PAGE 2 of 9

specified. G. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods

resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application. Include information specified

in "Field Quality Control" Article. I. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion. J. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with

requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized for 10 years in installing

joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single

manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers, for

testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other

specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist

during installation. 2. Submit not fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"

Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548. 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference

to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for

compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel, and indentation hardness.

4. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.



E. Pre construction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of nonelastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present. 5. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:

a. Install joint sealants in 60-inch- long joints using same materials and methods

for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.

b. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.

c. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.

d. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.

6. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

7. Evaluation of Pre construction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

F. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify

selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive

elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels

indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the

following conditions:



1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by

joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degF 3. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are

less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants

capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for

this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the

Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the

Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Continuous-Immersion-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants will be

immersed continuously in water, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247, including initial six-week immersion period and additional immersion periods specified below, and have not failed in adhesion or cohesion when tested with substrates indicated for Project. 1. Three additional four-week immersion periods.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will



come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated

in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description

indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and

openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the

Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part3, provide manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible

with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with

ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.



07920 JOINT SEALERS PAGE 6 of 9 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant

manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C919 for use

of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between

sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:



1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and

at locations indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of

elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each

floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:

a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts

approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece.

b. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.

c. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration

complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to

joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements. 5. Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.



6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or

noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide

products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following: 1. Products:

a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones. c. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. d. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Applications: Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

B. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,

provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following:

a. Chem-Calk 2641; Bostik Inc. b. Dynatred; Pecora Corporation. c. NP 2; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. d. DYmeric 511; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use(s) Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Applications:

a. Exterior Joints between different materials. b. Perimeter joints between materials and frames of doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated.

3.8 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE




A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with

the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. c. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. d. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior

doors, windows and other finishes. 3.9 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are

indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following:

a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide

products complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following:

a. Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant; Ohio Sealants, Inc. b. BA-98; Pecora Corporation. c. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco.

END OF SECTION

08110 STEEL FRAMES PAGE 1 of 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for hollow-core and solid-core wood doors

installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in wood doors and sidelights. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum

board partitions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


Division1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,

materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details

of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details

and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

E. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of

colors available for factory-finished doors and frames. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI100 "Recommended Specifications for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA80, are identical to door and frame

assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per ASTME152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies,

provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors conform to all standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and

job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.


08110 STEEL FRAMES PAGE 2 of 5

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided

refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high

wood blocking. Avoid using non vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Frames:

a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors. c. Ceco Door Products. d. Curries Co. e. Steelcraft.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTMA366 commercial quality, or

ASTMA620 drawing quality, special killed. B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTMA526 commercial

quality, or ASTMA642 drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTMA525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.

C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch- thick steel sheet; 0.0516-

inch- thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into

exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTMA153, Class C or D as applicable. 2.33 FRAMES

A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings,

according to ANSI/SDI100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Frames for interior metal doors shall be 16 gauge, of cold-rolled steel sheet; frames for exterior and stairwells shall be 14 gauge of cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners.

B. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike

jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit

Masonry." 2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects,

warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI100 requirements.



1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: a. Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb.

2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch

between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA80.

B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from

only cold-rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and

Frames." D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either

cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors,

panels, and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635-inch- thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 1. At exterior locations.

F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for

exposed screws and bolts. G. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or

scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTMC236 or ASTMC976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of 0.41

Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or better. H. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame

assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTME 1408, and classified according to ASTM E413.

I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware

according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI107 and ANSIA115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing, and provisions

for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. J. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. K. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and

Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

L. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359-inch- thick steel.

1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior

doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL



A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Comply with SSPC-PA1, "Paint Application Specification No.1," for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.

2.6 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non petroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil

or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTMA780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in

galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint20.

B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated,

apply air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 1. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance

requirements of FSTT-P-641, Type II. 2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP1 to remove dirt, oil,

grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP8 (Pickling).

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited

to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSIA224.1

acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install steel frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's

data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames

accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge

location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

2. In metal-stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel-stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA80.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING




A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from

doors and frames.

END OF SECTION

08210 WOOD DOORS

Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1.Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2.Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1.Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both flush wood doors and architectural woodwork.

2.Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.

3.Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and louvers.

B. Samples for Verification: As follows:

1.Corner sections of doors approximately 8 by 10 inches with door faces and edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finishsample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:

1.NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

2.AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements.

3.WIC Quality Standard: WIC's "Manual of Millwork" for grade of door, core, construction, finish,and other requirements.

a. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors meet requirements of grades specified.

b. Provide WIC Certified Compliance Certificate for installation.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.


08210 WOOD DOORS

Page 2 of 5 1.Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.

2.Oversized, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer's certificate stating that doors comply with all standard constructionrequirements of tested and labeled fire-door assemblies except for size.

3.Temperature-Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 degF maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

4.Temperature-Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 250 degF maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.


A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.Individually package doors in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

2.Individually package doors in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

3.Comply with WIC's Technical Bulletin 420-R for delivery, storage, and handling of doors.

B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with requirements of the referenced quality standard for Project's geographical location.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span, or do not comply with tolerances in referenced quality standard.

1.Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after the date of SubstantialCompletion:

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products


08210 WOOD DOORS

Page 3 of 5

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1.Flush Wood Doors:

a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.

b. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.

c. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.

d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.

e. Weyerhaeuser Co.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Grade: Premium (Grade A faces).

2.Faces: White oak, plain slice.

3.Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.

4.Match within Door Faces: Running match.

5.Pair and Set Match: Provide for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets.

B. Doors for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Grade: Premium.

2.Faces: Hardboard.

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Particleboard: ANSIA208.1, GradeLD-1.

2.Blocking: Provide wood blocking at particleboard-core doors as follows:

a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have closers.

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Core: Glued-block core.

2.Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planedbefore veneering.

C. Interior Hardboard-Faced Doors: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Core: Glued-block core.

2.Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied.


http://www.mohawkdoors.com/mvppa.htm

08210 WOOD DOORS

Page 4 of 5

D. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with the following requirements:

1.Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer'sstandard mineral-core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated.

2.Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated and as follows:

a. As necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers: As follows:

1.Blade Type: Vision proof, inverted V.

2.Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with Class II, color anodic finish complying with AA-C22A32/A34.

a. Color: White or as selected by the Architect.

B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.0478-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet, factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate flush wood doors in sizes indicated for Project site fitting. All doors openings and doors shall be measured in field so that the doors fabricated will leave no more than ½” of undercut according to NFPA guidelines.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:

1.Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA80 for fire-rated doors.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHIA115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1.Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions andalignment before factory machining.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1.Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2.Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors.

1.Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing


08210 WOOD DOORS

Page 5 of 5


characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2.Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1.Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.

C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE

Page 1 of 16 PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Furnishing of all mechanical and electrical finish hardware necessary for all doors, and hardware as specified herein and as enumerated in hardware sets and as indicated and required by actual conditions at the building. The hardware shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates, and all other devices necessary for the proper application of the hardware.

B. Related Sections

1. Division 6 Section - Finish Carpentry

2. Division 8 Section - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

3. Division 8 Section - Wood Doors

4. Division 8 Section - Aluminum Framed Storefronts

5. Division 8 Section - Glass and Glazing

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets:

1. Windows

2. Cabinets of all kinds, including open wall shelving and locks.

3. Signage, except as noted.

4. Complete toilet accessories including coat hooks, unless note otherwise.

5. Overhead doors, unless noted otherwise.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Applicable state and local building codes and standards.

B. FIRE/LIFE SAFETY

1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

a. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code b. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows c. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code d. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies e.

2. State Fire Safety Code and Amendments to CT Supplement

C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies

02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS#09205


Page 2 of 16 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies

3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies

4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

D. Accessibility

1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

2. ICC (CABO) / ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule

2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware

F. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 requirements. Advise architect within the submittal package of incompatibility or issues.

B. Catalog Cuts: Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, Include the following information:

1. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

2. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet; list locking device and function for each opening.

3. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.

4. Name and manufacturer of each item.

5. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

6. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings.

7. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

8. Mounting locations for hardware.

9. Door and frame sizes and materials.

10. Name and phone number for the local manufacturer's representative for each product.

11. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits, electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and/or access control components). Operational description should include how the door will operate on egress, ingress, and/or fire/smoke alarm connection.



Page 3 of 16 D. Key Schedule: After a keying meeting between representatives of the Owner, Architect, hardware

supplier, and, if requested, the representative for the lock manufacturer, provide a keying schedule, listing the levels of keying, as well as an explanation of the key system's function, the key symbols used, and the door numbers controlled. Utilize ANSI A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as a guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting the optimal keying system.

E. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule.

1. Samples will be returned to the supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to the Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

F. Templates: After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.

G. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of the hardware schedule, submit riser and wiring diagrams as required for the proper installation of complete electrical, electromechanical, and electromagnetic products.

H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 1 and include the following:

1. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

2. Catalog pages for each product.

3. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.

4. Parts list for each product.

5. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect “As installed.”

6. Copy of final keying schedule.

7. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts.

8. One (1) complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

9. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify the project.

I. Certificates of Compliance: Upon request of Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions shall be made available.


A. Substitutions: Products are to be those specified to ensure a uniform basis of acceptable materials. Requests for substitutions must be made in accordance with Division 1 requirements. If proposing a substitute product, submit product data for the proposed item with product data for the specified item and indicate basis for substitution and savings to be made. Provide sample if requested. Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.

1. Items specified as "no substitute” shall be provided exactly as listed.

2. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers listed have been requested by the Owner or Architect to match existing for continuity and/or future performance and maintenance standards or because there is no known equal product.



Page 4 of 16 3. If no other products are listed in a category, then "no substitute" is implied.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work for consultation.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwrites Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

E. Electronic Security Hardware: When electrified hardware is included in the hardware specification, the hardware supplier must employ an individual knowledgeable in electrified components and systems, who is capable of producing wiring diagrams and consulting as needed. Coordinate installation of the electronic security hardware with the Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related subcontractors. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.


A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Each article of hardware shall be individually packaged in manufacturer's original packaging.

C. Contractor will provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Items damaged in shipment shall be replaced promptly and with proper material and paid for by whomever did the damage or caused the damage to occur.

E. Hardware shall be handled in a manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Irregularities that occur to the hardware after it has been delivered to the Project shall be corrected, replaced, or repaired by the Contractor. Hardware shall be protected against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent.

F. No direct shipments will be allowed unless approved by the Contractor.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's warrantees as specified in Division 1 and as follows:

1. Closers: 10 years, except electronic closers, 2 years.

2. Exit Devices: 3 years, except electrified devices, 1 year.

3. Locksets: 3 years, except electrified locksets, 1 year.

4. Other hardware: 1 year.

B. No liability is to be assumed where damage or faulty operation is due to improper installation, improper use, or abuse.

C. Products judged to be defective during the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty, at no additional cost to the Owner.



Page 5 of 16 1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with paragraph 1.05.A.

B. Note that even though an acceptable substitute manufacturer may be listed, the product must provide all the functions and features of the specified product or it will not be approved.

Item Scheduled Manufacturer Acceptable Substitute Hinges Ives (IVE) Hager, McKinney, Stanley Flush Bolts & Coordinators Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Locksets & Deadlocks Schlage (SCH) No Substitution Exit Devices & Mullions Von Duprin (VON) No Substitution Keypad Locks Schlage (SCH) No Substitution Door Closers LCN (LCN) No Substitution Door Trim Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Protection Plates Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Stops & Holders Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Thresholds & Weatherstrip Pemko National Guard , Reese, Silencers Ives (IVE) Burns, Rockwood Cylinders & Keying Schlage (SCH) No Substitution Key Cabinets Telkee (TEL) HPC, Lund Electro-Mechanical Automatic Operators

LCN (LCN) Besam, Horton

C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of

hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

D. Where the hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to the Architect's approval.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent that no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Hardware shall be installed with the fasteners provided by the hardware manufacturer.

B. Hinges



Page 6 of 16 1. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges of type, material, and height as outlined in the following

guide for this specification:

a. 1-3/4 inch thick doors, up to and including 36 inches wide: b. Exterior: standard weight, bronze/stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches high c. Interior: standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches high d. 1-3/4 inch thick doors over 40 inches wide: e. Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high f. Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high g. 2 inches or thicker doors: h. Exterior: heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches high i. Interior: heavy weight, steel, 5 inches high j.

2. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional door height.

3. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins f.

4. The width of hinges shall be 4-1/2 inches at 1-3/4 inch thick doors, and 5 inches at 2 inches or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and/or wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

C. Flush Bolts

1. Provide automatic and manual flush bolts with forged bronze face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches in height. Top rods at manual flush bolts for doors over 90 inches in height shall be increased by 6 inches for each additional 6 inches of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

2. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Ives, Burns, Rockwood.

D. Coordinators

1. Provide a bar-type coordinating device, surface applied to the underside of the stop at the frame head where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors.

2. Provide a filler bar of the correct length for the unit to span the entire width of the opening, and appropriate brackets for parallel arm door closers and surface vertical rod exit device strikes. Factory-prep coordinators for vertical rod devices if required.


E. Cylindrical Locks - Grade 1

1. Provide cylindrical locks conforming to ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING.

2. Provide locksets able to withstand 1500 inch pounds of torque applied to the locked outside lever without gaining access per ANSI A156.2 Abusive Locked Lever Torque Test and cycle tested to 3 million cycles per ANSI A156.2 Cycle Test.

3. Provide solid steel rotational stops to control excessive rotation of the lever.

4. Lockset to be completely refunctionable. Lockset design shall allow function of lock to be changed into over twenty other common functions by swapping easily accessible parts.



Page 7 of 16 5. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with a 1/2 inch latch

throw. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

6. Provide locksets with a separate anti-rotation throughbolts, and shall have no exposed screws. Levers shall operate independently, and shall have two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.

7. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

8. Provide electrical options as scheduled.

9. Lever trim shall be solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. Locksets shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment.

a. Lever design shall be Schlage Sparta. b. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority having

jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning. c.

10. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Schlage ND series, No substitution.

F. Exit Devices

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit and/or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING.

2. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware.

3. Exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper or other device that eliminates noise associated with exit device operation. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width, but not the full length of the exit device rail. End-cap will have two-point attachment to door. Touch-pad shall match exit device finish, and shall be stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; for all other finishes, the touch-pad finish shall be of compatible finish to exit device. Only compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls.

4. Devices to incorporate a deadlatching feature for security and/or for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrical requirements.

5. Vertical rod devices shall be capable of being field modified to less bottom rod devices by removal of bottom rod and adding firing pin(s), if required at fire rated openings.

6. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes.

7. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at a height recommended by the exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by the Architect.

8. Mechanism case shall sit flush on the face of all flush doors, or spacers shall be furnished to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off the face of the door, provide glass bead kits.

9. Non-fire-rated exit devices shall have cylinder dogging.

10. Removable mullions shall be a 2 inches x 3 inches steel tube. Where scheduled, mullion shall be of a type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.

11. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to a 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set.

a. Lever style will match the lever style of the locksets.



Page 8 of 16 b. Lever trim on doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction to be

hazardous shall have a tactile warning. c.

12. Exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware.

13. Provide electrical options as scheduled.

14. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Von Duprin 99/33 series, No Substitution

a. Lever design shall be Schlage 17\ G. Door Closers

1. Provide door closers certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. Surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacture code.

2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder, and shall utilize full complement bearings at shaft. Cylinder body shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter, and double heat-treated pinion journal shall be 11/16 inch diameter.

3. Provide hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the requirements of the UL10C “positive pressure” fire test.

4. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.

5. Provide closers with a solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers. When closers are parallel arm mounted, provide closers which mount within a 6-inch top rail without the use of a mounting plate so that closer shall not be visible through vision panel from pull side.

6. Closers shall not incorporate Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) technology.

7. Closer cylinders, arms, adapter plates, and metal covers shall have a powder coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or shall have special rust inhibitor (SRI).

8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other finish hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

9. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

10. Door closers meeting this specification: LCN 4010/4110 series, No Substitute.

H. Electro-Mechanical Automatic Operators

1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI A156.19 where automatic operators are specified.

2. The operator shall be powered with a DC motor working through reduction gears. Closing shall be spring force. No manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closer will be acceptable. The motor is to be off when the door is in closing mode. The door can be manually operated with the power on or off without damage to the operator. The operator shall include variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment. Operator shall be mounted in an aluminum cover.



Page 9 of 16 3. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to activate power

operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors.

4. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.

5. Provide hard-wired actuator switches for operation as specified. Actuators shall be weather-resistant type at exterior applications.

6. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the automatic operator as required for the function as described in the operation description of the hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to 2.04 KEYING.

7. Where automatic operators are scheduled, provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators shall control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators shall be sequenced to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by the Architect. Locate the actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by the Architect.

8. Provide units with inputs for smoke evacuation doors, where specified, which allow doors to power open upon fire alarm activation and hold open indefinitely or until fire alarm is reset, a presence detector input, which prevents a closed door from opening or a door that is fully opened from closing, a hold open toggle input, which allows remote activation for indefinite hold open and close the second time the input is activated, vestibule inputs, which allow sequencing operation of two units, and a SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices.

9. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: LCN Senior Swing 4500 series, Besam Swingmaster MP, Horton 4000LE series.

I. Door Trim

1. Provide push plates 4 inches wide x 16 inches high x 0.050 inch thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust width to fit.

2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Push bars shall be of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull.

3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

4. Provide flush pulls as specified. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model.

5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar.

6. Provide pull plates 4 inches wide x 16 inches high x 0.050 inch thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches wide plate, adjust width to fit.

7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled.


J. Protection Plates

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch. Furnish with machine or wood screws, finished to match plates. Sizes of plates shall be as follows:

a. Kick Plates – 16 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs



Page 10 of 16 b. Mop Plates – 4 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of

door on pairs c.


K. Door Stops and Holders

1. Provide door stops for all doors in accordance with the following requirements:

a. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

b. Where wall stops cannot be used, provide dome type floor stops of the proper height. c. At any opening where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, a medium duty surface mounted

overhead stop shall be used. d.


L. Thresholds, Seals, Door Sweeps, Automatic Door Bottoms, and Gasketing

1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items as closely as possible. Size of thresholds shall be as follows:

a. Saddle Thresholds – 1/2 inch high x jamb width x door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds – 1/2 inch high x 5 inches wide x door width c.

2. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

3. Acceptable manufacturers and/or products: Pemko, National Guard, Reese.

M. Silencers

1. Provide "Push-in" type silencers for each hollow metal or wood frame. Provide three for each single frame and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified or required by code.


2.03 FINISHES

A. Finish of all hardware shall be US26D (BHMA 626/652) with the exceptions as follows:

1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: US32D (BHMA 630).

2. Continuous Hinges: US32D (BHMA 630).

3. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: US32D (BHMA 630).

4. Protection Plates: US32D (BHMA 630).

5. Overhead Stops and Holders: US32D (BHMA 630).

6. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match.

7. Wall Stops: US32D (BHMA 630).

8. Latch Protectors: US32D (BHMA 630).

9. Weatherstipping: Clear Anodized Aluminum.

10. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum.



Page 11 of 16 2.04 KEYING

A. Provide a new key system from the same manufacturer as the locks conforming to the following requirements:

1. Provide restricted patented removable core cylinders at all openings specified to have cylinders. Restricted shall control the access to the products by requiring a signed letter of authorization and/or authorization form from the Owner or authorized agent of the Owner. Patent shall protect against the unauthorized manufacturing and duplication of the products. Restricted patented cores shall not be operable by non-patented key blanks. Restricted patented cores shall incorporate a mechanism to check for the patented features on the keys. Provide construction cores with construction master keying for use during construction. The hardware supplier, accompanied by the Owner or Owner’s security agent, shall install permanent keyed cores upon completion of the project. The temporary construction cores are to be returned to the hardware supplier.

2. Provide permanent cores and cylinders keyed by the manufacturer or authorized distributor as directed by the Owner. Provide owner with a copy of the bitting list, return receipt requested.

3. The hardware supplier, accompanied by a qualified factory representative for the manufacturer of the cores and cylinders, shall meet with Owner and Architect to review keying requirements and lock functions prior to ordering finish hardware. Submit a keying schedule to Architect for approval.

4. Provide cores and cylinders, unless noted otherwise, operated by a Grand Master Key System to be established for this project (Do not use the letter "I", “O”, or “X” for any of the grand masters). Allow for twenty-four Master Keys under each Grand Master, and sixty-four changes under each master key. All cylinders shall be keyed in alike or different sets as noted by their respective key set number. Do not use the letter "I" or “O” in any of the master key sets.

5. Provide patented restricted keys as follows:

a. Ten grand master keys for each set. b. Ten master keys for each set. c. Three keys per core and/or cylinder. d. Two construction core control keys e. Two permanent core control keys f. Six construction master keys for each type g.

6. Visual key control:

a. Keys shall be stamped with their respective key set number and stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE".

b. Grand master and master keys shall be stamped with their respective key set letters. c. Do not stamp any keys with the factory key change number. d. Do not stamp any cores with key set on face (front) of Core. Stamp on back or side of cores

so not to be visible when core is in cylinder. e.

7. Deliver grand master keys, master keys, change keys, and/or key blanks from the factory or authorized distributor directly to the Owner in sealed containers, return receipt requested. Failure to comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the keying system that was compromised at no additional cost to the Owner.

8. Approved products: Schlage Everest D, No Substitution.

2.05 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Provide a key control system, including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the Project.

1. Provide complete cross index system set up by the hardware supplier, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule.



Page 12 of 16 2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.

3. Approved products: Telkee, HPC, Lund.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of any hardware, examine all doors, frames, walls and related items for conditions that would prevent proper installation of finish hardware. Correct all defects prior to proceeding with installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordination:

1. Prior to installation of hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of instructing installers on proper installation and adjustment of finish hardware. Representatives of locks, exit devices, closers, automatic operators, and electrified hardware shall conduct training; provide at least 10 days notice to representatives. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect.

2. Prior to ordering electrified hardware, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of coordinating finish hardware with security, electrical, doors and frames, and other related suppliers. A representative of the supplier of finish hardware, and doors and frames, the electrical subcontractor, and the Owner’s security contractor shall meet with the Owner, Architect, and General Contractor prior to ordering finish hardware. After meeting a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect.

B. Hardware will be installed by qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware. For technical assistance if necessary, installers may contact the manufacturer’s rep for the item in question, as listed in the hardware schedule.

C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute.

D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer.

E. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

G. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

3.03 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.

B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

D. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustment, lubrication, and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes.



Page 13 of 16 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to Substantial Completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of locks, exit devices, closer, and any electrified hardware, shall perform the following work:

1. Examine and re-adjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner’s personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.

3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units.

4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems of substantial nature in the performance of the hardware.

5. At completion of project, a qualified factory representative for the manufacturers of locksets, closer, exit devices, and access control products shall arrange and hold a training session to instruct the Owner’s personnel on the proper maintenance, adjustment, and/or operation of their respective products. After training a letter of compliance, indicating when the training was held and who was in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Provide for the proper protection of complete items of hardware until the Owner accepts the project as complete. Damaged or disfigured hardware shall be replaced or repaired by the responsible party.

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section “Finish Hardware,” hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.

B. It is intended that the following schedule includes complete items of finish hardware necessary to complete the work. If a discrepancy is found in the schedule, such as a missing item, improper hardware for a frame, door or fire codes, the preamble will be the deciding document.

C. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the Hardware Sets for series, type, and function. Refer to the preamble for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

D. Hardware Sets

Hardware Set 1 Doors: 23 Each to Receive: 1 EA EXIT DEVICE CD99L-#17 LEVER

1 EA CLOSER 4111-CUSH-DA

1 EA KICK PLATE 16" X 34" 18GA B4E

1 EA THRESHOLD 171A-36"

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 305CR 1/36" 2/84"

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN-36"

REUSE EXISTING HINGES Hardware Set 2 Doors: 20 Each to Receive: 2 EA CONT HINGE CFM83SLFHD-CC8-SER

2 EA EXIT DEVICE EL-SD9948NL-OP



Page 14 of 16 2 EA CYLINDER 26-091-XQ11-948-ICX

2 EA CYLINDER 20-057-ICX

2 EA OFFSET PULL 8190-2

2 EA AUTO OPERATOR 9553-REG2-MOUNTING PLATE 9550-18-72" REG2-MOUNTING PLATE 9550-18-72"

2 EA KICK PLATE 8 X 34" 18GA B4E 2 EA KICK PLATE 8 X 34" 18GA B4E

1 EA THRESHOLD 171A-72" 1 EA THRESHOLD 171A-72"

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY ALUMINIUM DOOR SUPPLIER BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY ALUMINIUM DOOR SUPPLIER Hardware Set 3 Hardware Set 3 Doors: 16 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

1 EA LOCKSET ND70TD-8SPA

1 EA PERMANENT CORES 23-030 X D EVEREST X 3 KEYS

1 EA CLOSER 4011

1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV

3 EA SILENCER 3446

GC NOTE: MODIFY EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 4 Doors: 4 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

1 EA LOCKSET ND80TD-8SPA




3 EA SILENCER 3446

1 EA LOUVERS 800 A-1 18 X 24

GC NOTE: MODIFY EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 5 Doors: 3, 5 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

1 EA PRIVACYSET ND40S-SPA

1 EA CLOSER 4011



3 EA SILENCER 3446

1 EA LOUVERS 800 A-1 18 X 24 GC TO MODIFY EXISTING DOOR TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 6 Doors: 1, 14 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP

1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99L-F-#17 LEVER

1 EA CLOSER 4111-SCUSH




Page 15 of 16 1 EA THRESHOLD 171A-36"

1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 305CR 1/36" 2/84"


GC NOTE: MODIFY EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 7 Doors: 6, 8, 11, 15, 18, 19, 21 Each to Receive: 3 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

1 EA LOCKSET ND50TD-SPA


1 EA CLOSER 4011



3 EA SILENCER 3446

GC NOTE: MODIFY EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 8 Doors: 7 Each to Receive: 6 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

2 EA FLUSHBOLTS FB457

1 EA DP STRIKE DP2



2 EA CLOSER 4011

2 EA KICK PLATE 16 X 35" 18GA B4E


2 EA SILENCER 3446 Hardware Set 9 Doors: 9, 10 Each to Receive: 6 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5


1 EA DP STRIKE DP2




2 EA SILENCER 3446

GC NOTE: MODIFY EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES TO ACCEPT NEW HARDWARE Hardware Set 10 Doors: 12, 13 Each to Receive: 6 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5


1 EA DP STRIKE DP2

1 EA LOCKSET ND50TD-SPA 1 EA PERMANENT CORES 23-030 X D EVEREST X 3 KEYS

1 EA CLOSER 4011



Page 16 of 16


ACTIVE LEAF 1 EA KICK PLATE 16 X 11" 18GA B4E

1 EA KICK PLATE 16 X 35" 18GA B4E


2 EA SILENCER 3446 Hardware Set 11 Doors: 22 Each to Receive: 1 EA WEATHERSTRIP 305CR 1/36" 2/84"


REUSE BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE Hardware Set 12 Doors: 2 Each to Receive: 6 EA HINGES 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5

2 EA EXIT DEVICE 9927L-LBR-#17 LEVER

2 EA CYLINDER 20-057-ICX


2 EA CLOSER 4111-EDA



2 EA SILENCER 3446 Hardware Set 13 Doors: 24 Each to Receive: 20 EA MASTER KEYS PER EACH SET

6 EA CONSTRUCTION MASTER KEYS

2 EA CONSTRUCTION CONTROL KEYS

2 EA PERMANENT CONTROL KEYS

1 EA EXTRA CUT KEY WITH EACH LOCK

1 KEY CABINET CAPACITY OF 150% OF THE NUMBER OF KEYSETS 1 KEY CABINET COMPLETE SET UP

END OF SECTION

08800 GLAZING PAGE 1 of 8



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified

in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 4. Storefront framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced

glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a

specified gas. C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed

to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm

glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTME1300,

according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from

basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.

c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically

or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1. Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

d. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than

15 degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action. 1. Load Duration: 30 days.



e. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch whichever is less. 1. For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. 2. For insulating glass.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the

following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degF ambient; 180 degF material surfaces.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified

based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a

nominal 1/2-inch- wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW4.1 computer

program, expressed as Btu/ sq.ft. x h x degF 4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC200 methodology using LBL-35298

WINDOW4.1 computer program. 5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC300.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass and of 12-

inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

C. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass.

1. Wired glass. 2. Fire-resistive glazing products. 3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate

their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply

with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants. 3. Glazing gaskets.

G. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric glazing sealant specified to be validated by

SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level3 (Master Glaziers).



B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer

using the same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each

product and installation method indicated. F. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article

from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience

and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTME548. G. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports

in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according

to ASTMC1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTME548. H. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA80 that are listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA252.

I. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA257. J. Safety Glass: CategoryII materials complying with testing requirements in 16CFR1201 and

ANSIZ97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification

label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

K. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with

insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature

conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.



1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and

signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as

indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS

A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong-held) or horizontal (roller-hearth) process, at

manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTMC1048; TypeI (transparent glass, flat); Qualityq3 (glazing

select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part3. 2.4 WIRED GLASS

A. Wired Glass: ASTMC1036, TypeII (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class1 (clear), Qualityq8

(glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:

a. Meshm1 (diamond).

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTME774 for ClassCBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end of Part3.

B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass

Schedule at the end of Part3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.

C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

1. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:



1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

B. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to

obtain fire-protection rating. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content

of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTMC1281 and AAMA800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA804.3 tape, where indicated.

2.8 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with

molded corner units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTMC542, black. B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying

with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTMC864.

C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material

indicated below; complying with ASTMC509, TypeII, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a ShoreA durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a ShoreA durometer hardness required

by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking). 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for

Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.




A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets

at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other

glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum

edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in

glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and

then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start



gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket

by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of

sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTMC716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary

wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers

to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,

including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.

3.9 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide TypeI

(transparent glass, flat), Class1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following: 1. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered).

3.10 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE



A. Low-E Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide low-emissivity

insulating-glass units complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following:

a. Pilkington North America Inc. b. AFG Industries, Inc. c. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1in. and 1/4 in.. 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Outdoor Lite: TypeI (transparent glass, flat) float glass.

a. Class 1 (clear). b. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.

5. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 70% 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 33%

END OF SECTION

08810 GLASS BLOCK

Page 1 of 2 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SCOPE A. Furnish and install aluminum window grid(s), glazing materials, glass block boots, sealant, framing, flashing, and other items necessary for complete window installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Related work specified elsewhere: C. Glass and Glazing D. Sealant 1.2. GUARANTEE A. Window manufacturer shall guarantee for a period of one year from the date of purchase that the windows will be free of defects in materials and factory workmanship, and that defective materials will be repaired or replaced immediately, after proper notification. B. The installing contractor shall guarantee for a period of one year against faulty installation workmanship or water leakage due to on-site errors 1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit assembly instructions and installation drawings as required to indicate methods on construction, location and spacing of anchorage, joinery, finishes, sizes, shape, thickness and alloy materials, glazing materials, and relationship to the adjoining work. 1.4. MATERIAL STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store material in dry place, off the ground, where temperature will not exceed 90 degrees Fahrenheit. B, Handle material to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Do not install scratched or damaged components. C. After installation, protect finished surfaces from damage caused by ensuing work. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective

covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 % of materials, of each different type, color, pattern, and size. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. MATERIALS A. IBP Glass Block Grid System for Windows: extruded aluminum Glass Block Grid System for windows as manufactured by 1 Innovative Building Products, Inc., 2917 W. 7th Street, Fort Worth, TX, 76107 2 Solaris B. Glass Block Boots. C Sealant: TradeMateâ Glass Block Sealant. C. Finish: Selected from manufacturer's standard finishes and colors.


08810 GLASS BLOCK

Page 2 of 2


D Glass block units: 7 3/4" x 7 3/4" x 3 1/8" thick, partially evacuated hollow units, made of clear or colored glass as manufactured by

1. Pittsburgh Corning, 2. Solaris.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. FIELD CONDITIONS A. Verify all applicable field dimensions and adjust as necessary to accommodate window frame. B. Examine supporting frame to which window will be attached. Correct any conditions which are not constructed according to installation instructions furnished by window manufacturer. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. Assemble and seal glass block grid system for window according to instructions furnished by manufacturer. B. Apply continuous sealant bead to back of window Z-bar. Place assembled glass block grid system frame into properly prepared and sized rough opening and adjust until plumb and level. Screw or nail grid system in place utilizing all predrilled holes in nail flange. C. Insert glass block into glass block boot according to instructions furnished by glass block grid system manufacturer. Carefully insert glass blocks into grid system from exterior side of window so that each block is pressed against T-Bar. D. . Apply sealant to completely fill channel around each glass block and wipe flush with surface. Apply sealant to exterior frame corners according to instructions furnished by grid system manufacturer. 3.3. CLEAN-UP A Clean all exposed surfaces of aluminum glass block grid system with clean, soft cloth and mild hand soap using gentle rubbing action. Do not use abrasive or solvent-type cleaners, detergents, or paint removers. B. Remove all labels from glass block and clean with soft cloth and water.

END OF THE SECTION

09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PAGE 1 of 9





1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non-load-bearing steel framing.


1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for non load-bearing steel framing. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in

gypsum board assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board

assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim

accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings,

provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory." B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance

Design Manual." C. Abuse-Resistant Characteristics: For gypsum wallboard manufactured to have greater

resistance to surface indentation from incidental impacts and through-penetration from blunt hard-body impacts than standard wallboard. Besides having enhanced abuse-resistance properties, these panels are heavier and stronger than standard wallboard, which improves dimensional stability, appearance, and resistance to sound transmission.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and

identification of manufacturer or supplier.



B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from

weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring:

a. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. d. National Gypsum Company. e. Scafco Corporation. f. Unimast, Inc.

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Hanger Attachments to Slab: As follows:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching

hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Hangers: As follows:

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch

(4.12-mm) diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538

inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Depth: As indicated.

E. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of

main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be



incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation. c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: As follows:

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated.

C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of

gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.

D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and

contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to

reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a

slotted leg (web) or attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. H. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and

other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each

area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.



1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: As indicated.

2. Type X:

a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: As indicated.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead (J-Bead): Use at exposed panel edges. c. L-Bead: Use where indicated. d. U-Bead: Use where indicated. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping

compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:



1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."


A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal

frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing

installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board

assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading

imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor.

Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use proprietary deflection track where indicated. b. Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.

Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger 02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS #09205


spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members

for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. D. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for

assemblies indicated. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than

that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum

board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt-felt isolation strip

between studs and wall. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended

ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.

C. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:

1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 24 inches (610 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel

can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable

written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.



2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint.

3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

F. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless

otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7

Section "Building Insulation." 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily

installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to

avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and

ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open

(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above

ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural

members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except

floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints,

and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and



finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.

M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.

3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate

courses of board. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before

applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and

face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with

screws.

3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved

by Architect for visual effect. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended

for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840,

for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where

indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated.

3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, 02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVEMENTS #09205



fasteners, and trim flanges where indicated. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to

tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where indicated.


A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will

conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project,

will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board

ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of ceiling support framing.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PAGE 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide acoustical ceiling Work as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein, including the following:

1. Acoustical Mineral Fiber Tile and Panel Ceilings.

a. Lay-in panel installation - (exposed-grid)

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for related Mechanical and Electrical Work installed in ceilings. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition.

C 423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method.

C 635 Metal Suspension System for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

C 636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay- In

Panels.

E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

E 119 Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

D 1779 Specification for Adhesion for Acoustical Materials

E 413 Determination of Sound Transmission Class

B. AMA -1-II Ceiling Sound Transmission Test By Two-Room Method

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory.

D. Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association, "Job Conditions".

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Direct Suspension System

Directly fastened to floor or roof construction above, installed as part of the Work of Section 05170.

B. Indirect Suspension System

Installed as part of the Work of this Section, as specified by ceiling system manufacturer to be attached to direct suspension system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data

Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for acoustical ceiling materials, indicating compliance with applicable regulations.

B. Shop Drawings



Submit shop drawing details of reflected ceiling plans indicating mechanical, electrical and

other Work above, penetrating or connected to acoustical ceiling. Indicate framing and support details for Work supported by the suspension system.

1. Scale: 1/4"=1'-0" required on Reflected Ceiling Plans.

C. Samples

1. Submit samples of the following materials, prior to installation;

a. Acoustical panels: 12"x12" samples of each type, pattern and color.

b. Metal Pan Ceiling units: Full size sample of each type and finish.

c. Exposed runners and moldings: 12" long samples of each color and system type required.

d. Concealed suspension members: 1 set of each assembly specified.

e. Adhesive: 1 pint of adhesive used for direct attachment of acoustical panels to

substrate.

2. Forward each approved sample type to Mechanical Installer for purpose of matching diffusers.

D. Certificates

Submit certificates from manufacturer of acoustical ceiling units and suspension systems attesting that their products comply with specified requirements.


A. Qualifications Installer is to be a firm with not less than five years of successful experience in the installation

of specified materials.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Building Code: Work of this Section shall conform to all requirements of the Connecticut Building Code and all applicable regulations of other governmental authorities.

2. Acoustical and Insulating Materials Association

C. Certifications

Furnish manufacturers certification from an independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that acoustical tile units comply with fire test performance characteristics, including FS-S-SS-S118B.

D. Fire Performance Characteristics

Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to ASTM test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E84

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2. Smoke Developed: 25 or less.

E. Fire Resistance Ratings



As shown by reference to design designation in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for floor, roof, or beam assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire protected membrane; tested per ASTM E 119. Provide protection materials for lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements of rated assembly shown on Drawings.

F. Coordination of Work

Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating through ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression systems and partitions. Resolve all discrepancies and conflicts prior to start of Work.

G. Pre-installation Conference

Prior to start of Work, installer of acoustical system and representatives of trades involved are to have a conference at the job site, in the presence of the Authority representative, to discuss coordination of ceiling system installation and resolve all discrepancies.


A. Delivery

Deliver all acoustical units in manufacturer's original, unopened packages fully identified with type, finish, performance data and compliance labeling.

B. Storage

1. Store materials where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes.

2. Open ends of tile containers 24 hours prior to installation to stabilize moisture content and

temperature.

C. Handling

Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Space Enclosure

Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is completed, and until air temperature and humidity will be maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

1.09 GUARANTEE

A. Work showing any of the following defects within the one year guarantee period specified in the Contract shall be corrected as directed by the Agency.

1. Loose tiles or tiles improperly secured

2. Tiles showing discoloration or cracking.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to the Agency Representative. Furnish extra materials, described below, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount

installed.

2. Metal Pan Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed.




A. Acoustical Tile

1. Mineral Composition Tile

a. Armstrong World Industries - "Travertone"

b. The Celotex Corp. - "Celotone"

c. USG Acoustical Products Co.- "Acoustone"

B. Indirect Metal Suspension Systems

1. Chicago Metallic Corporation

2. Donn Corporation; Division of United States Gypsum Interiors, Inc.

3. W.A.V.E. (Worthington Armstrong Venture Enterprises)

2.02 MATERIALS - ACOUSTICAL TILES

A. Mineral Fiber Tile

Provide Form 1 units per ASTM E1264; of designation, style, finish, color, STC range, edge detail and size as indicated below:


A. Tile Adhesive

Comply with ASTM D 1779 or FS-MMM-A-00150, factory made product recommended by manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread.

B. Primer

In accordance with manufacturer of acoustical tile adhesive, substrate shall be primed with one of the following products prior to application of adhesive to remove any residual which would prevent proper attachment of tile:

1. Chemical Wash

2. Sizing

3. Adhesive base or primer

C. Edge Moldings and Trim Pieces

Provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling units which fit with

type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the building before beginning Work to determine that it is properly enclosed and the structure is in proper condition to receive acoustical materials and suspension system. Area shall be broom cleaned and uninterrupted for free movement of rolling scaffold. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions prevail.

B. Verify that direct suspension system has been installed properly, that main runners are spaced evenly

and have been leveled to a tolerance of 1/8" in 12' measured both lengthwise on each runner and



transversely between parallel runners so that indirect suspension system installation may proceed accurately.

C. Start of Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions, therefore, contractor is advised to bring

any discrepancies to the attention of the Authority prior to start of Work. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordination

Provide and coordinate the locations of inserts, clips, or other supports for support of acoustical ceilings.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders and comply with approved shop drawings of reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and in compliance with ASTM C 636, governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements, as indicated and

1. Coordinate requirements for Work of other trades to be built into ceiling system. Provide

supplementary framing as required.

B. Arrange directionally-patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans, or as approved by the Architect. Install in patterns indicated, (balanced borders all sided) symmetrical or centered about center line or corridors, panels, fixtures, beam haunches, rooms, spaces.

C. Cut as required for installation of electric fixtures, air diffusers, grilles, access doors, provided under

other contracts. (Verify sizes and locations with other trades).

D. On completion, the acoustic ceilings shall present a uniform plane surface, free from blemishes and imperfections.

E. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where

necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.

1. Sealant Bed: Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant, concealed on back of vertical leg before installing moldings.

2. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from

ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system with suspension members concealed

by support of tile units. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and penetrations. 3.08 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace Work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently

eliminate evidence of damage.

C. Remove and replace Work that is damaged or soiled by other trades as directed by owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION



09651 RESILIENT FLOORING PAGE 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Vinyl composite sheet 3. Vinyl base 4. Linoleum Sheets

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units

showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient products certifying that each product

furnished complies with requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient floor tile to include in the maintenance manuals specified in

Division1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who

has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of product specified from one source

with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq.cm or greater when tested per ASTME648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per

ASTME662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,

each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures

maintained between 50 and 90 degF C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.


09651 RESILIENT FLOORING PAGE 2 of 4

D. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.


A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 degF or more than 95degF in spaces to receive

products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 degF or more than 95 degF

B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation

recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed. E. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond

with adhesive, as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with

protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,

pattern, class, wearing surface, and size of resilient tile flooring installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.


A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for

each designation in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule at the end of Part3. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE

A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F1066 and with requirements

specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule. 2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES

A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FSSS-W-40, TypeII and with requirements

specified in the Resilient Tile Flooring Schedule. B. Vinyl Accessory Moldings: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Tile

Flooring Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,

with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified.



B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTMF710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other

materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by flooring manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with resilient product manufacturer's written installation instructions for

preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Be aware that the hazardous material abatement contractor will be using mechanical means for floor tile removal after which contractor is to prep floor with leveling compound over all floors.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with

flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product

installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and

other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Install premolded outside corners before installing straight pieces. 6. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without

whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

B. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with

adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient

product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer.




4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to floor surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive,

and surface blemishes, if recommended in writing by manufacturer. For vinyl flooring also apply six thin coats of agency’s finish (to be provided by the agency), allowing sufficient drying time between each coat. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to flooring manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.

2. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until

inspection for Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or

hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.

C. Clean floor surfaces not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to

establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing

installation only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by flooring manufacturer.

2. After cleaning, reapply polish to floor surfaces to restore protective floor finish according to flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's maintenance program.

3.5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SCHEDULE

A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl composition floor tile

complying with the following: 1. Available Products:

a. Armstring World Industries b Tarkett c. Johnsonite

2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and

patterns produced for tile complying with requirements indicated. 3. Class: Class1 (solid-color tile). 4. Wearing Surface: Smooth. 5. Thickness: 3/16 inch 6. Size: 12 by 12 inches 7. For stair wells Type MR, color gray # 207, large circles, .200 inch thickness at the

landings 8. For stair wells Mondo Mondostep Tuype B, pattern MR for treads and raisers.

B. Linoleum Sheet: When this designation is indicated on the alternates, use products from the

following manufacturer. a. Forbo Marmoleum Sheeting

END OF SECTION

09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 of 4



Conditions and Division1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient wall base.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of

units showing the full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long, of

each product color and pattern specified. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying

that each product furnished complies with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who

has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with

resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTME648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per

ASTME662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers,

each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures

maintained between 50 and 90 deg F C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation,

unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive



resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After post installation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F

B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed. C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and

for time period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of

damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each

different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with F-1861, Type TV and with requirements specified in

the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base

and Accessory Schedule. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based

formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and

substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur,

with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates

indicated to receive resilient products.



B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient

products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and

other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of

resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 5. Form outside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without

whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.

C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with

adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. D. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's written

installation instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:

1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient

product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product

manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.

B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from

construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to vinyl resilient products installed on floors and stairs that

are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes, if recommended by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to resilient product manufacturer.




2. Cover resilient products installed on floors and stairs with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.

C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended

to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Before cleaning, strip protective floor polish that was applied to vinyl products on floors

and stairs after completing installation only if required to restore polish finish and if recommended by resilient product manufacturer.

2. After cleaning, reapply polish on vinyl products on floors and stairs to restore protective floor finish according to resilient product manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate with Owner's maintenance program.

3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Vinyl Wall Base: Where this designation is indicated, provide vinyl wall base complying with the

following: 1. Available Products:

a. Roppe Corp., Fostoria, OH b. Marley Flexco, Tuscumbia, AL c. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc., Lawrence, MA

2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and

patterns produced for vinyl wall base complying with requirements indicated. 3. Style:

a. Non-carpet areas: Cove with top-set toe. b. Carpeted areas: Straight with no toe.

4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch 5. Height: 4 inches 6. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet. 7. Outside Corners: Job formed. 8. Inside Corners: Job formed. 9. Surface: Smooth.

END OF SECTION

09680 CARPET PAGE 1 of 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. This Section includes carpet and installation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility

with carpet and carpet cushion adhesives. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for subflooring and underlayment. 3. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for materials and installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory

specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate.

C. Shop Drawings showing columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and

locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following: 1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 3. Seam locations, types, and methods. 4. Type of subfloor. 5. Type of installation. 6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 7. Pile direction.

D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of materials

showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of carpet indicated.

E. Schedule of carpet using same room designations indicated on Drawings. F. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual

specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet cushion, including manufacturer's

recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and

performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm whose carpet materials comply with the U.S.

Department of Housing and Urban Development's (HUD) "Use of Materials Bulletin UM-44D" and are currently listed on HUD's "Certified Products Directory" and so identified by imprint on back of carpet.


09680 CARPET PAGE 2 of 3

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer.

D. Carpet Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire-test-response

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. 2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84.


A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and

Handling." B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with

identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. C. Store materials on-site in original undamaged packages, inside well-ventilated area protected

from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground.


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed

and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

C. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24

hours when tested by calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures not less than 55 deg F

D. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water

and pHydrion paper is applied. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of

other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full-width units equal to 5 percent

of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Provide products from the following manufacturers, preferable the one with the highest content

of recycled materials:

a. Bentley Prince Street b. Durkan


09680 CARPET PAGE 3 of 3


c. Lees d. Mohawk


A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with

requirements specified in this Section and those of the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare

substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are

incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. C. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine

subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of

carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet.

C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of finished

carpet floor, install carpet before installation of these items. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture

including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable

flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation.

1. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 2. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 1 of 10




A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:

1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to

shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is

not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including

color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,

and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:

a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Light fixtures. c. Distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible

spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums.

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:

a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate.

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:

a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other

code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 2 of 10 architectural woodwork.

3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum

board. 5. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for industrial paints and maintenance and special

coatings. 6. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Division s

15 and 16, respectively. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at

an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured

at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured

at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when

measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at

a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use.

3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors

available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate

actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and

primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application.

3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar

joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- square samples of each color and material

on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or

stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch-

long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 3 of 10 demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting

system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating

system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of

coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCAP5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for

each type of coating and substrate to be painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required.

2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply

coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate

coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum

ambient temperature of 45degF . Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste

daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.


A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90degF . B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and

surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95degF .


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 4 of 10 C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85

percent; or at temperatures less than 5degF above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are

enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the

quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1

case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by

use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 4. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P&L). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W).

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that

are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating

types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate

colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other

manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance

for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting

will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and

surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and

conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 5 of 10 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over

substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting

fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed

using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of

substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's

written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and

mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.

3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral

spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white

shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet

wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of

varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop

coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and

according to requirements of SSPC-SP10.


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 6 of 10 b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash

coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so

surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of

foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when

multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match

exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 7 of 10 moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of

appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the

manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items

exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. Accessory items.

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards.

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete

coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by

the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,

opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of

even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no

evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,

or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 8 of 10 A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as

the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the

paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.

2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. l. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance.

3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being

used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded

paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.

Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCAP1. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Low-Luster, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by

the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 1. Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex

Primer-Sealer. 2. Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer &

Underbody #216.


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 9 of 10 3. P & L: Z/F1004 Suprime "4" Interior Latex Wall

Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic-latex, interior

enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils . 1. Devoe: 34XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggshell

Enamel. 2. Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet #319. 3. P & L: Z/F4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet.

B. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood

surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater.

a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as

recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 1. Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime All-Purpose Latex

Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier. 2. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 3. P & L: Z/F1001 Suprime "1" 100 Percent Acrylic

Multi-Purpose Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at

spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils . 1. Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior

Latex Enamel. 2. Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex

Enamel #333. 3. P & L: Z/F4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss.

C. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new, interior woodwork:

1. Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of a waterborne, clear-satin varnish

over a sealer coat and a waterborne, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer. 1. Devoe: None required. 2. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 3. P & L: None required.

b. Stain Coat: Waterborne, interior wood stain applied at spreading rate

recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Devoe: 41XX WoodWorks Waterborne Interior Stain. 2. Moore: Benwood Penetrating Stain #234. 3. P & L: Z197 Acrylic Latex Stain Interior.

c. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer. 1. Devoe: 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick-Dry

Clear Sealer. 2. Moore: None recommended.


09900 PAINTING

PAGE 10 of 10


3. P & L: Z7520 Latex Sanding Sealer. d. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading

rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Devoe: 4300 WoodWorks Waterborne Crystal Clear

Finish, Satin. 2. Moore: Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423, Satin. 3. P & L: Z17 Acrylic Latex Varnish, Satin.

F. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new, interior woodwork:

1. Waterborne, Satin-Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats of a waterborne, clear-satin varnish

over a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer. 1. Devoe: None required. 2. Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 3. P & L: None required.

b. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by the

manufacturer. 1. Devoe: 4200 WoodWorks Waterborne Quick-Dry

Clear Sealer. 2. Moore: None recommended. 3. P & L: Z7520 Latex Sanding Sealer.

c. First and Second Finish Coats: Waterborne, varnish finish applied at spreading

rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Devoe: 4300 WoodWorks Waterborne Crystal Clear

Finish, Satin. 2. Moore: Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423, Satin. 3. P & L: Z17 Acrylic Latex Varnish, Satin.

END OF SECTION

10425 SIGNAGE PAGE 1 of 3

SECTION 10425 - Signage PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Signage for all interior doors.

1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209-92A Standard Specifications for Aluminum and Aluminum - Sheet and Plate. B. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal products. National Association of Architectural

Metal manufacturers. C. The American with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to

materials, dimesions of individual component, profiles and finishes B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations and large scale section

of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories and installation details.

2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording and

lettering layout.

C. Samples: .

1. Submit full size range of samples for initial selection of colors, patterns, and texture

a. cast acrylic sheet b. bronze or brass c. other required materials.

2. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected. Submit at least on full size

sample of each type of signage specified.

a.. Include one representative sample of of the graphic image process required. b. Show graphic styles, and colors and finishes of letters or numbers and other

graphic devises. c. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variatio, include sample sets

showing the full range of variations expected, d. Include every method of attachment.


A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section

who has specialized in installing similar signage to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sign, specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.


A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication when necessary

to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Graphic Content and Style. Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for

size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes and colors of letters, numbers and other graphic devices.

1. Signs that designate permanent rooms and spaces and signs that provide direction to or

information about functional spaces and other signs required to comply, shall comply with the American with Disabilities Act.(ADA)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cast acrylic sheet; Cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer

plastic sheet, sizes and thickness indicated, minimum flexural strength of 16,000psi when tested according with ASTM D 79o; minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 degrees F (80 degrees C). Color to be opaque acrylic sheet.

B. Bronze plate: Cooper alloy INS C2800, Muntz metal 60 % copper. C. Metal fasteners; Use metal that are not corrosive to the sign material or mounting surface. D. Anchors and Inserts; use nonferrous metals or hot dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for

exterior installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts as required to be set into concrete or masonry work

E. Wall Mounted Panel Signs Mountings:

1. Mechanical mountings: Sheet metal or wood screws to suit substrate; pan head, theft proof head, Phillips oval head, or round head screws as selected by the owner.

F. Bracket Mounting Unit: Manufacturer’s standard brackets fittings and hardware as appropriate for

mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. 2.03 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign materials that requires selection of materials

with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related with appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s standards.

B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM “ Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and

applications recommendations.

2.04 PANEL SIGNS A. General.

1. Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, color, design, shapes sizes and details of construction.

2. Produce smooth, even, level, sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions.

B. Frameless panel Signs: fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform




with the following requirements:

1. Edge Condition: Beveled 2. Corner condition: Square corners.

C. Backing: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturer’s standards process where required by fabrication process or mounting methods, or where otherwise indicated. D. Panel sign copy process and materials:

1. Raised copy: Machine-cut copy characters from machine matte finish opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks


A. General;

1. locate signs units and accessories where indicated using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions

2. Install signs level, plumb and at the height indicate, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.

B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers:

1. Mount letters and numbers using standards fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction and condition of exposure indicated

2. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 3. Mount letters with back in contact with the wall or projected from wall surface as indicated.

C. Wall Mounted Panel Signs:

1. Attach panel signs in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and using mounting methods indicated.

D. Bracket Mounted Units:

1. Attach brackets and fittings securely to walls or ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with manufacturer’s directions.

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Protect

units from damage until final acceptance by the owner.

. END OF SECTION

10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PAGE 1 of 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1. Toilet and bath accessories.


1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry" for blocking required at wall mounted accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions,

profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate preparation

instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.

D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and

for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions,

capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Other manufacturers' products with equal characteristics may be considered. See Division

1 Section "Substitutions." 2. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's

approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the


10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PAGE 2 of 4

following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:

a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304, with No.4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum

nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sheet Steel: ASTMA366/A366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal

thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTMA653/A653M, G60 D. Chromium Plating: ASTMB456, Service Condition Number SC2 (moderate service), nickel plus

chromium electrodeposited on base metal. E. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. F. Mirror Glass: ASTMC1036, TypeI, Class1, Qualityq2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering,

electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FSDD-M-411. G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTMA153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and

theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as

approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior

surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight

seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

D. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded

construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.

E. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge

protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size,

with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

F. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and

theft-resistant installation, as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to

hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.



G. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.


A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to

manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf when tested according to

method in ASTMF446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function

properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Paper Towel Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless-steel paper towel

dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: To be provided by the Agency for installation by the Contractor.

a. Kimberly Clark - Model # 0970610.

2. Surface-Mounted Type: Sized for minimum of 400 single-fold paper towels; with hinged

front equipped with tumbler lockset; and with refill indicators that are pierced slots at sides or front. a. Paper towel dispenser shall be provided in all kitchen areas with blocking as

required. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide toilet tissue dispenser

complying with the following: 1. Products:

a. Kimberly Clark Jumbo - Model # 0967610.

2. Type: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. 4. Material: Stainless steel. 5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with mfr's standard spindle. 6. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- diameter-core tissue rolls.

C. Soap Dispenser: Where this designation is indicated, provide soap dispenser complying with

the following: 1. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Horizontal-Tank Type: Surface-mounted type, minimum 40-oz.

capacity tank with stainless-steel piston, springs, and internal parts designed to dispense soap in measured quantity by pump action; and stainless-steel cover with unbreakable window-type refill indicator.




a. Soap Valve: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. b. Soap dispensers shall be provided in public bathrooms only.

D. Grab Bar: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with

the following: 1. Products:

a. Bobrick: B-6806 2. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch. 3. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture. 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches for heavy-duty applications.

G. Mirror Unit: Where this designation is indicated, provide mirror unit complying with the

following: 1. Products:

a. Channel Framed Mirror:

1. B-165

2. Stainless-Steel, Channel-Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from minimum nominal 0.0375-inch- thick stainless-steel channels in manufacturer's standard satin or bright finish with square corners mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked.

a. Mirrors in handicapped bathrooms shall be located no higher than 3’-6” from the

finished floor to the bottom of the reflective surface in accordance with the ADA.

H. Stainless Steel Shelf with hooks. Where this designation is indicated, provide shelf complying with the following:

1 Bobrick

END OF SECTION

SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PAGE 1 OF 12


SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


PAGE 2 OF 12


G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and

that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

D. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and system of mechanical equipment and materials in relationships with other systems, installations, and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the work. Include the following:

1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.

2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including space for disassembly required by periodic maintenance.

4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.

5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of equipment into building during construction.

9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations, floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems, components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted items.


PAGE 3 OF 12


11. Access door and access panel locations, with fire-ratings required to maintain fire ratings of construction, in locations as required for proper access for maintenance adjustment, repair and removal of all equipment and devices.

12. Scale: Minimum 1/4” = 1’ -0” for floor plans, 3/8” = 1” -0” for Mechanical rooms.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.


PAGE 4 OF 12


a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Eslon Thermoplastics.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


PAGE 5 OF 12



a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


PAGE 6 OF 12


2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).


a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).


a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to

secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.


PAGE 7 OF 12


2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.


PAGE 8 OF 12


F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or

split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish. i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. j. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure

flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.


PAGE 9 OF 12


1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for

pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.

4. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop and smokestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.


PAGE 10 OF 12


2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings

according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.


PAGE 11 OF 12


3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified

in Division 3.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.


PAGE 12 OF 12


G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.


SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PAGE 1 OF 9


SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL.



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure.

2. Division 15 Sections on Fire-Suppression Piping for fire-suppression pipe hangers. 3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for vibration isolation

and seismic restraint devices.

C. This sub-contractor is responsible for all supplemental steel for all piping and equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

D. Design and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger shield insert indicated.


PAGE 2 OF 9


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.


A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pipe Hangers:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. c. Grinnell Corp. d. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.


PAGE 3 OF 9


2. Channel Support Systems:

a. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. c. Thomas & Betts Corp. d. Unistrut Corp.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. b. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc. c. PHS Industries, Inc. d. Pipe Shields, Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. b. Hilti, Inc. c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.

1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct

contact with copper tubing.

B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. 2. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct

contact with copper tubing.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass with vapor barrier. 3. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor

barrier. 4. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass or water-repellent-treated,

ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 5. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type I cellular glass. 6. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate. 7. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe. 8. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. 9. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.



PAGE 4 OF 9


A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Specification Sections.

C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN100 to DN400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN20 to DN600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN15 to DN600), if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN15 to DN100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN20 to DN200).

7. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN15 to DN200).

9. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2 (DN15 to DN50).

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN10 to DN200).

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN10 to DN80).

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipe, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN15 to DN750). 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900),

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.


PAGE 5 OF 9


15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN100 to DN900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN65 to DN900), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN25 to DN750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20 (DN65 to DN500), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN50 to DN1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN50 to DN600), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN50 to DN750), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building

attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange

edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for

heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.


PAGE 6 OF 9


12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (675 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1350 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal

movement where head room is limited.

G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-density, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium silicate or cellular-glass pipe insulation, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree sheet metal shield.

H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4

inches (32 mm). 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in

piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25

percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one

support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.


PAGE 7 OF 9


C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.

D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with

clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.


PAGE 8 OF 9


b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52

mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm)

thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67

mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

3.4 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of

welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."


PAGE 9 OF 9


Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.


SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PAGE 1 OF 6

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment signs. 3. Access panel and door markers. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Duct markers. 6. Stencils. 7. Valve tags. 8. Valve schedules. 9. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PAGE 2 OF 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS\

2.1 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All pipe, duct, and equipment markers will be plenum rated.

2.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment.

1. Data:

a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. c. Labels of tested compliances.

2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. 2. Data:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and

speed.

3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

C. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. 2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment

identification. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) in

length, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

D. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) center hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES



PAGE 3 OF 6 A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and

showing direction of flow.

1. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each

application length. 3. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers

extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-

type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label. 5. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as

separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.

C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor barrier.

2.4 DUCT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Duct Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include direction and quantity of airflow and duct service (such as supply, return, and exhaust). Include contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door markers, equipment markers, equipment signs, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in

pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise

indicated.

2.6 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.

1. Material: 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick brass. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass beaded chain; or S-hook.

2.7 VALVE SCHEDULES

A. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule. Include mounting screws.

2. Frame: Extruded aluminum. 3. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing Quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.



PAGE 4 OF 6

2.8 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm). 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

2.9 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units. 2. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. 3. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equipment. 4. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. 5. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

B. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.

1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:

a. Green: For cooling equipment and components. b. Yellow: For heating equipment and components. c. Orange: For combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

3. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety device s and hazardous units such as

gas outlets. b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. g. Tanks and pressure vessels. h. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.



PAGE 5 OF 6 B. Stenciled Equipment Sign Option: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of laminated-plastic

equipment signs, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

1. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.

2. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.

B. Stenciled Pipe Marker Option: Stenciled markers may be provided instead of manufactured pipe markers, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe markers with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1 on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where

flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6

m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.

3.3 DUCT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install duct markers with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Green: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Blue: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. 5. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

B. Stenciled Duct Marker Option: Stenciled markers, showing service and direction of flow, may be provided instead of laminated-plastic duct markers, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.



PAGE 6 OF 6


3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. c. Fire Protection: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. d. Gas: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. e. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Fire Protection: Natural. d. Gas: Natural. e. Chilled Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black. c. Fire Protection: Black. d. Gas: Black. e. Chilled Water: Black.

3.5 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION

A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.


SECTION 15081 DUCT INSULATION

PAGE 1 OF 9


SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.


1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop System" for firestopping materials and requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.

2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.

3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems. 4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for double wall duct.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Removable insulation sections at access panels. 2. Application of field-applied jackets. 3. Applications at linkages for control devices.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Submit 12-inch- (300-mm-) square sections of each sample material.

1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-applied finish material indicated.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Sub-contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having


PAGE 2 OF 9


jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.


PAGE 3 OF 9


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Manson. b. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. d. Schuller International, Inc.

B. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.

1. Finish: Smooth finish.

2.2 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray. 3. PVC Jacket Color: Custom color selected by the Architect.

D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire surface in contact with insulation. Metal thickness and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this Section.

1. Finish: Smooth finish. 2. Finish: Cross-crimp corrugated finish. 3. Finish: Stucco-embossed finish. 4. Finish: Factory-painted finish. 5. Moisture Barrier: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.

2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (270 g/sq. m).


PAGE 4 OF 9


1. Tape Width: 4 inches (100 mm).

B. Bands: 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick. 3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch (0.18 mm) thick. 4. Brass: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick. 5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch (0.13 mm) thick.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm), nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch (1.6-mm), soft-annealed, galvanized steel.

D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.

1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb (45 kg) for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface.

2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each duct system.

C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.


PAGE 5 OF 9


F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.

I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and joints

and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.

1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.

2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof flashing.

1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic. 2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends. 3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.

P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.

Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.

R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top of floor.

1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends with vapor-retarder mastic.


PAGE 6 OF 9


3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm). Space 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers. 5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation

surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50

mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment with 1/2-inch (13-mm) staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.

7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.

8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to receive vapor retarder.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of jacket manufacturer's

recommended adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Apply aluminum jacket for exterior and exposed interior insulated supply and return ductwork. See duct system applications.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.


PAGE 7 OF 9


2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch (1.6mm) thick coats of jacket manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Apply aluminum jacket for exterior insulated supply and return ductwork and for exposed insulated ductwork.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.

C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:

1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork. 2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork. 3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork. 4. Indoor dishwasher ductwork.

D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts (double wall). 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Testing agency labels and stamps. 8. Nameplates and data plates. 9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

B. Service: Round, return-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.


PAGE 8 OF 9


2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

C. Service: Round, outside-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-6 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

D. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

E. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

F. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-6 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: No. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

G. Service: Round, supply-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

H. Service: Round, outside-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-6 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

I. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum


PAGE 9 OF 9


5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes

J. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Number of Layers: One. 3. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

K. Service: Rectangular dishwashers exhaust ductwork.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-3.5 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.

L. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, exposed.

1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket. 2. Minimum R-Value – R-6 3. Number of Layers: One. 4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum. 5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.


SECTION 15110 VALVES

PAGE 1 OF 13


SECTION 15110 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general-duty valves.


1. Division 15 Fire-Suppression Piping for fire-protection valves. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and actuators. 4. Division 15 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 5. SWP: Steam working pressure. 6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.


PAGE 2 OF 13



A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water, sanitary waste, and storm drainage piping valves unless referenced.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.


PAGE 3 OF 13


VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.

B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Valve Actuators:

1. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller, except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug

valves, for each size square plug head.

G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.

H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F (454 deg C) for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F (216 deg C) for ball valves.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.3 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 2, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. American Valve, Inc. b. Cincinnati Valve Co. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Hammond Valve. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell, Wm. Co.

B. Bronze Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.


PAGE 4 OF 13


C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc.

D. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Angle Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc.

2.4 CAST-IRON ANGLE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type II, Cast-Iron Angle Valves with Metal Seats:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. NIBCO INC.

B. Cast-Iron Angle Valves, General: MSS SP-85, Type II.

C. Class 250, Cast-Iron Angle Valves: Bronze mounted with gray-iron body and bronze seats.

2.5 COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Hammond Valve. c. Jamesbury, Inc. d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

B. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.

C. Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with regular-port, chrome-plated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.

2.6 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hammond Valve. 2. Jamesbury, Inc. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 4. NIBCO INC.

B. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with flanged ends.

C. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 150, regular port.

D. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Class 300, regular port.

2.7 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES


PAGE 5 OF 13


A. Manufacturers:

1. Flangeless, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Flanged, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves:

a. Bray International, Inc. b. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. Mueller Steam Specialty. e. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls.

3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves:


B. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, Type I, for tight shutoff, with disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flangeless, 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Wafer type with one- or two-piece stem.

D. Flanged, 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Flanged-end type with two-piece stem.

E. Flanged, 250-psig (1725-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Flanged-end type with two-piece stem.

F. Grooved-End, 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP Rating, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Ductile-iron or steel body with grooved or shouldered ends.

2.8 HIGH-PRESSURE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. 2. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. 3. Grinnell Corporation. 4. Jamesbury, Inc.

B. High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-68.

C. Flangeless, Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type.

D. Single-Flange, Class 300, High-Pressure Butterfly Valves: Wafer-lug type.

2.9 BRONZE CHECK VALVES


PAGE 6 OF 13


A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Walworth Co.

2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Kitz Corporation of America. c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.

C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

E. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

F. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

G. Type 4, Class 150, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

H. Type 4, Class 200, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and bronze seat.

2.10 GRAY-IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type II, Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves with Composition to Metal Seats:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Mueller Co. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Swing Check Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Mueller Co. c. Victaulic Co. of America.


PAGE 7 OF 13


B. Gray-Iron Swing Check Valves, General: MSS SP-71.

C. Type II, Class 250, gray-iron, swing check valves with composition to metal seats.

D. 300-psig (2070-kPa) CWP Rating, Grooved-End, Swing Check Valves: Ductile-iron body with grooved or shouldered ends.

2.11 FERROUS-ALLOY WAFER CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Single-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy, Wafer Check Valves:

a. Gestra, Inc. b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. c. Mueller Co. d. Techno Corp. e. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. f. Wheatley Gaso, Inc.

2. Dual-Plate, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged-Type Check Valves:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Gulf Valve Co. c. Techno Corp.

B. Ferrous-Alloy Wafer Check Valves, General: API 594, spring loaded.

C. Single-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body.

D. Dual-Plate, Class 250 or 300, Ferrous-Alloy, Double-Flanged Check Valves: Flanged-end body.

2.12 SPRING-LOADED, LIFT-DISC CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves:

a. Mueller Steam Specialty.

2. Type II, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. Mueller Steam Specialty.

3. Type IV, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


PAGE 8 OF 13


B. Lift-Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring-loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze or alloy seat.

C. Type I, Class 250, Wafer Lift-Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter matching companion flanges.

D. Type II, Class 250, Compact-Wafer, Lift-Disc Check Valves: Compact-wafer style with cast-iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.

E. Type IV, Class 150, Threaded Lift-Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and threaded ends.

2.13 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Powell, Wm. Co.

2. Type 2, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Solid-Wedge Gate Valves:


3. Type 3, Bronze, Rising-Stem, Split-Wedge Gate Valves:

a. Cincinnati Valve Co. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Grinnell Corporation. d. NIBCO INC.

B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

C. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge.

D. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.

E. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze solid wedge.

F. Type 3, Class 200, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with rising stem and bronze split wedge.

2.14 CAST-IRON GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Cast-Iron, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Grinnell Corporation. b. Hammond Valve.


PAGE 9 OF 13


c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:


B. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.

C. Class 250, NRS, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

D. Class 250, OS&Y, Bronze-Mounted, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

E. Class 250, NRS, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, nonrising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

F. Class 250, OS&Y, All-Iron, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with cast-iron trim, rising stem, and solid-wedge disc.

2.15 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.

C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc.

D. Type 2, Class 200, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc.

2.16 CAST-IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Type I, Cast-Iron Globe Valves with Metal Seats: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

B. Cast-Iron Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-85.


PAGE 10 OF 13


C. Type I, Class 250, Cast-Iron Globe Valves: Gray-iron body with bronze seats.

2.17 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Lubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:

a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. b. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. c. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. d. R & M Energy Systems (Tomball, TX). e. Walworth Co.

2. Nonlubricated-Type, Cast-Iron Plug Valves:

a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. b. Grinnell Corporation. c. Mueller Flow Technologies. d. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. e. Wheatley Gaso, Inc. f. Xomox Corporation.

B. Cast-Iron Plug Valves, General: MSS SP-78.

C. Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

D. Class 125 or 150, nonlubricated-type, cast-iron plug valves.

2.18 RESILIENT-SEATED, CAST-IRON, ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. 2. Milliken Valve Company. 3. Olson Technologies; Homestead Div. 4. Pratt, Henry Company. 5. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.

B. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Smaller: Design similar to MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig (1207-kPa) minimum CWP.

1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Resilient-Seated, Cast-Iron, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: MSS SP-108, and rated for 175-psig (1207-kPa) minimum CWP.

1. Resilient Seating Material: Suitable for potable-water service, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


PAGE 11 OF 13


A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 250, cast iron. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Two -piece, 600-psig (4140-kPa) CWP rating, copper

alloy. 4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 150, ferrous alloy. 5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flangeless or Flanged, 150-psig (1035-kPa)

CWP rating, ferrous alloy, with EPDM liner. 6. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 7. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. 8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron. 9. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type IV, Class 150. 10. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I or II, Class 250,

cast iron. 11. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1 or 2, Class 150, bronze. 12. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 250, NRS or OS&Y, bronze-mounted

cast iron. 13. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze. 14. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 15. Plug Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Class 125 or 150, lubricated-type with FDA-approved-

material sealant or nonlubricated-type, cast iron. 16. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP

rating, cast iron.

D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:


PAGE 12 OF 13


1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 200, bronze. 2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 250, cast iron. 3. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Two-piece, 400-psig (2760-kPa) CWP rating, copper

alloy. 4. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 300, ferrous alloy. 5. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged, 250-psig (1725-kPa) CWP rating,

ferrous alloy, with liner. 6. High-Pressure Butterfly Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: Class 300. 7. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 200, horizontal or vertical, bronze. 8. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 200, bronze. 9. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type II, Class 250, gray iron. 10. Wafer Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Double-flanged, Class 250 or 300, ferrous

alloy. 11. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type IV, Class 200. 12. Spring-Loaded, Lift-Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I or II, Class 250,

cast iron. 13. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2 or 3, Class 200, bronze. 14. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 15. Globe Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 2, Class 200, bronze. 16. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type I, Class 250, bronze-mounted cast iron. 17. Resilient-Seated, Eccentric Plug Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: 175-psig (1207-kPa) CWP

rating, cast iron.

E. Waste Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig (4140-kPa) CWP rating, copper alloy.

2. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 4, Class 150, bronze. 3. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type 1 or 2, Class 150, bronze.

F. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water services.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded ends. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged or threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install chainwheel operators on valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor elevation.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:


PAGE 13 OF 13


1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.


SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 7


SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Sub-contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.

B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section 07841 “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” for materials and methods for penetrations through fire and smoke rated assemblies.

2. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, pressure gages, and fittings. 3. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

B. PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene plastic.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with 80 psig (550 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components.


PAGE 2 OF 7


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping.

3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 VALVES

A. Bronze and cast-iron, general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.


PAGE 3 OF 7


B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.

D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

E. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution."

F. Under-Building-Slab, Domestic Water Piping on House Side of Water Meter, NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K (Type C); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

G. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

2. NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 and DN 40): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

3. NPS 2 (DN 50): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to 3-1/3 (DN 65 to DN90): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

5. NPS 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B) with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

6. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B) with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use cast-iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water-Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated and Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Calibrated balancing valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."


PAGE 4 OF 7


3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Install under-building-slab copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

D. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

F. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators are specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation and install water meters according to utility company's requirements.

B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.

C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6 and utility's requirements.

1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.


PAGE 5 OF 7


2. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

4. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.

5. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility and of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

B. Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

F. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.


PAGE 6 OF 7


I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

J. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Test domestic water piping as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.


PAGE 7 OF 7


6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application

where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PAGE 1 OF 6


SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building and to locations indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping systems specialties. 2. Division 7 Section 07841 “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” for materials and methods for

penetrations through fire and smoke rated assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer. 3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 4. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system, include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


PAGE 2 OF 6


B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

B. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

C. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.2 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPING

A. Hub-and-Spigot Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

B. Hubless Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

1. Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

a. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

1) NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide shield with 4 bands.

2) NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4-inch- (102-mm-) wide shield with 6 bands.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.


PAGE 3 OF 6


C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping:

1. Use hubless, cast-iron soil piping and the following:

a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.

D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following piping materials:

1. NPS 2 to NPS 4 (DN 50 to DN 100): Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for Project-site sanitary sewer piping.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation.

C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.

E. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems.

F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

J. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

K. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in locations indicated and as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.


PAGE 4 OF 6


L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod. 6. NPS 15 (DN 375): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1-inch (25-mm) rod. 7. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).


PAGE 5 OF 6


G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 10 feet (3 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

K. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet (3 m).

L. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

M. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties."


PAGE 6 OF 6


4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PAGE 1 OF 8


SECTION 15410 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers." 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and specialty fixtures not in

this Section. 3. Division 7 Section 07841 “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” for materials and methods for

penetrations through fire and smoke rated assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.


PAGE 2 OF 8


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), 1985-494-187" about plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

F. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

G. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Hand Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 3. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 4. Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M. 5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 6. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 7. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucet Hose: ASTM D 3901. 5. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M. 6. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 7. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 8. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 9. NSF Materials: NSF 61. 10. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 12. Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings and Piping: ASTM F 409. 5. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951. 6. Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.1M.

K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.


PAGE 3 OF 8


2. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANFACTURERS

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in other Part 2 articles.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in other Part 2 articles.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

1. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body Material: Cast brass or brass underbody with brass cover plate. 3. Finish: Polished chrome plate, Polished brass. 4. Type: Single-control mixing. 5. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm). 6. Mounting: Deck, exposed 7. Handle(s): Lever 8. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 (DN 10) tubing, plain end. 9. Spout: Rigid. 10. Spout Outlet: Aerator, 0.5 gpm (1.9 L/min.). 11. Operation: Noncompression, manual, Automatic, Metering. 12. Drain: Grid. 13. Tempering Device: Thermostatic.

2.3 SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucet: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

1. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body Material: Cast brass. 3. Finish: Polished chrome plate.


PAGE 4 OF 8


4. Type: Kitchen faucet with spray, three-hole fixture, Kitchen faucet without spray. 5. Mixing Valve: Single control. 6. Backflow Protection Device for Hose Outlet: Required. 7. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm). 8. Mounting: Deck, concealed. 9. Handles: Lever. 10. Inlets: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) plain-end tubing. 11. Spout: Swivel gooseneck. 12. Spout Outlet: Aerator. 13. Operation: Noncompression, manual. 14. Drain: Lift and turn. 15. Tempering Device: Mechanical.

2.4 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seat: Solid plastic.

1. Configuration: Open front without cover. 2. Size: Elongated. 3. Class: Heavy-duty commercial. 4. Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check. 5. Color: White.

2.5 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Guard, Manufactured, plastic covering for hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping and complying with ADA requirements.

2.6 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Water-Closet Support, Water-closet combination carrier designed for accessible and standard mounting height. Include single or double, vertical or horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide pipe space.

B. Urinal Support, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

1. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

C. Lavatory Support, Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod. Include steel uprights with feet.

1. Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

2.7 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, Accessible and standard, wall-hanging, back-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.

1. Available Products: 2. Products:


PAGE 5 OF 8


a. American Standard, Inc b. Kohler Co c. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div

3. Style: Flushometer valve.

a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design.

1) Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6 L/flush).

b. Color: White 4. Fixture Support: Water-closet support combination carrier.

B. Water Closets,: Accessible and standard, wall-mounted, vitreous-china fixture designed flushometer valve operation.


a. American Standard, Inc b. Kohler Co. c. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div

3. Style: Flushometer valve.

a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. b. Height: Standard, Accessible. c. Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6 L/flush). d. Color: White

2.8 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories, Accessible, wall-hanging, vitreous-china fixture.


a. American Standard b. Kohler Co. c. U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div.

3. Type: Slab 4. Size: 20 by 18 inches (508 by 457 mm) rectangular. 5. Faucet Hole Punching: Three, 4-inch (102-mm) centers, holes. 6. Faucet Hole Location: Top 7. Color: White. 8. Faucet: Lavatory for separate drain. 9. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops. 10. Drain: Grid. 11. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) chrome-plated cast-brass trap; NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) thick

tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. 12. Protective Shielding Guards 13. Fixture Support: Lavatory


PAGE 6 OF 8


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if roughing-in data are not indicated.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

M. Install toilet seats on water closets.


PAGE 7 OF 8


N. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

O. Install water-supply, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

P. Install faucet, flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install shower, flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

R. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

S. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for escutcheons.

T. Set shower receptors, service basins in leveling bed of cement grout. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for grout.

U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.

C. Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.

D. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to plumbing piping.

E. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing piping.


A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.


PAGE 8 OF 8


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS

PAGE 1 OF 9

02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR WELLNESS CENTER SECOND FLOOR #09205

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes rectangular, and round ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa).


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.

2. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors for access to concealed ducts.

3. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to ducts and installed in exterior walls.

4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for duct insulation. 5. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounted access

doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 6. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 7. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Control" for automatic volume-control dampers

and operators. 8. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting of

manual-volume dampers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.


PAGE 2 OF 9


1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating pressure classifications and sizes on plans. 3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcement and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction. 6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, seismic

restraints, and duct attachment.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and

other operating devices. 4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

F. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices.


PAGE 3 OF 9



A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for concealed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm) length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.2 SEALANT MATERIALS


PAGE 4 OF 9


A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.

1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. 2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials.

1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.

1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are electrolytically

separated from ductwork.


PAGE 5 OF 9


2.4 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification.

2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.

B. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts: Type 304, stainless steel sheet. Weld and flange seams and joints.

C. Acid-Resistant Exhaust Ducts: Type 304, stainless steel sheet. (Exhaust from controlled waste room).

D. Wet Areas Exhaust Ducts: Aluminum with seams and laps arranged on top of duct (exhaust from shower room and locker room).

E. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following:

1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch wg (750 Pa), positive pressure. 2. Return Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa), negative pressure. 4. Process Ducts: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), negative pressure, positive pressure.

F. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm) and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of unbraced panel area.

2.5 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION

A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

2.6 ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa):


PAGE 6 OF 9


a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches (75 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches (685 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). c. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mm).

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa):

a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches (75 to 355 mm) in Diameter: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm). b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches (380 to 660 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm). c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches (685 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). d. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). e. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (1575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mm).

4. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

5. Round Elbows, 8 Inches (200 mm) and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

6. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm): Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

7. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm), and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) and All Pressures: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with two-piece welded construction.

9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above. 10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) and Pressures through 10-Inch wg (2490

Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.


PAGE 7 OF 9


J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L. All ductwork is to be hung from structure above. Provide support and supplemental steel as necessary.

M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

P. Use double wall ductwork as indicated on contract drawings.

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION IN FINISHED AREAS

A. Install aluminum exhaust duct in locker rooms and shower room.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet (3.7 m), unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L. All ductwork is to be hung from structure above. Provide support and supplemental steel as necessary.

M. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.


PAGE 8 OF 9


N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Fire stopping."

P. SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

Q. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

R. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Transverse joints.

S. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."


A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in presence of Architect, at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.Select paragraph above or below.


PAGE 9 OF 9


C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2-inch wg (500 Pa) (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 2- to 10-inch wg (500 to 2490 Pa).

D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.

E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.

B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed procedures.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.


SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

PAGE 1 OF 11


SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. (Provide Control Contractor) 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. (Provide Control Contractor) 6. Combination fire and smoke dampers. (Provide Control Contractor) 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct-mounting access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Flexible ducts. 11. Duct accessory hardware. 12. Silencers. 13. Duct liner.


1. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Addressable System" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors. 2. Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic damper

actuators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Manual Volume dampers. 3. Motorized control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct-mounting access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Flexible ducts. 11. Silencers 12. Duct liner

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


PAGE 2 OF 11


1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Motorized-control damper installations. 4. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations, including

sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.

D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc.


PAGE 3 OF 11


2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Greenheck. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

C. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners and mounting flange.

D. Blades: 0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminum.

E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.

F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. METALAIRE, Inc. 3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 4. Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic. 5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.


PAGE 4 OF 11


D. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Angle-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic thrust or ball. 5. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 6. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

E. Jackshaft: 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

F. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

G. Motorized Control Dampers (Provide Control Contractor)

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.

H. General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch-(2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- (1.61-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches (203 mm).

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 3. Provide parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber

seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (995 Pa) when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.

4. Provide with 24V actuators, coordinate with Division 16.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company.


PAGE 5 OF 11


B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555.

C. Fire Rating: 3 hours.

D. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch (1.3 or 3.5 mm) thick as indicated and of length to suit application.

2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

H. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

I. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.

2.6 SMOKE/COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS (PROVIDE CONTROL CONTRACTOR, SEE SECTION 15900)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Greenheck. 3. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 4. Ruskin Company.

B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating.

C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.

D. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

F. Damper Motors: Modulating and two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose

entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).

4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).

5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).


PAGE 6 OF 11


6. Electrical Connection: 24 Volt, coordinate with Division 16.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, single double-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm) and Larger: One additional hinge.

C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch (25-mm) thickness. Include cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.


PAGE 7 OF 11


D. Pressure Relief Access Door: Single wall and duct mounting; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated, latches, and retaining chain.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Greenheck. e. KEES, Inc. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

F. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.


F. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.


G. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.

1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. (474 g/sq. m).


PAGE 8 OF 11


2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp and 340 lbf/inch (60 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C).

2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.

B. Noninsulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg250 Pa negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 28 to plus 99 deg C).

C. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F (Minus 28 to plus 99 deg C).

D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 to 450 mm) to suit duct size.

2.11 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

2.12 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Aero Sonics 2. McGill Air Flow 3. Noise Control Products 4. Vibro-Acoustic

B. Prefabricated Silencers / Materials and Construction:

Outer casings of rectangular or tubular silencers shall be a galvanized steel. Interior perforated baffles shall be fabricated from galvanized steel. Fill materials shall be Fiberglass, under compression to obtain the specified acoustic performance and to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, moisture resistant, and vermin proof. Casings shall have roll formed seams, mastic filled. The silencers shall be airtight and structurally sound to 8” water column. Each silencer shall be completely assembled without using spot welds in order to maintain the integrity of the galvanized coating.


PAGE 9 OF 11


C. Performance: Acoustic and aerodynamic performance shall be based on independent laboratory tests performed in accordance with ASTM E-477 and shall be submitted to the Engineer upon request. Submittal data shall include dynamic insertion loss in both forward flow and reverse flow conditions. Static pressure drops shall be reported for actual air flow conditions.

2.13 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to air stream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

1. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean temperature. 3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of

50, when tested according to ASTM C 411. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916. 5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.

b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) into airstream.

c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connectors, lagged with loaded vinyl sheet on inlets and outlets.


PAGE 10 OF 11


I. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot

(15-m) spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

K. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter.

L. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 7 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 13 inches (330 mm) in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 19 inches (480 mm) in diameter.

M. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

N. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

O. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

P. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

Q. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

R. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive liquid.

S. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

T. Install duct with duct liner (min. 20' from supply at return fan).

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.


PAGE 11 OF 11


B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."


SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PAGE 1 OF 3


SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling-and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

3. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Aluminum circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, with opposed blade dampers, generally located in the ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: Aluminum, opposed blade dampers, which can be located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: Aluminum combination grille and opposed blade damper over an air opening.

D. Linear Slot Diffusers: Aluminum, with insulated plenum and opposed blade dampers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.

2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in ceilings and walls.


PAGE 2 OF 3



A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Diffusers, linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers,linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


PAGE 3 OF 3


3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, linear slot diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.


SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PAGE 1 OF 24


SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. 2. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 3. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.

J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke-control system.

K. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition.


PAGE 2 OF 24


L. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

M. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

N. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

O. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

P. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

Q. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

R. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

S. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

F. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.


PAGE 3 OF 24


e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and

referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibrat

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.


PAGE 4 OF 24


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control

devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

H. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

I. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.


PAGE 5 OF 24


M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and

fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to

balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems”.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.


PAGE 6 OF 24


C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that

houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.


PAGE 7 OF 24


3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.


PAGE 8 OF 24


4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully

closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor

nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.


PAGE 9 OF 24


B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated

flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. If hydronic, measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.


PAGE 10 OF 24


B. If steam, measure entering-water temperature and flow and leaving steam pressure, temperature, and flow.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.15 PROCEDURES FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOODS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each kitchen hood. For kitchen hoods designed with integral makeup air, measure and adjust the exhaust and makeup airflow. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, provide an explanation in the report of the reason(s) why and also the reason why the method used was chosen.

1. Install welded test ports in the sides of the exhaust duct for the duct Pitot-tube traverse. Install each test port with a threaded cap that is liquid tight.

B. After balancing is complete, do the following:


PAGE 11 OF 24


1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection. 2. Measure and record the hood face velocity. Make measurements at multiple points across the

face of the hood. Perform measurements at a maximum of 12 inches (300 mm) between points and between any point and the perimeter. Calculate the average of the measurements recorded. Verify that the hood average face velocity complies with the Contract Documents and governing codes.

3. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to room airflow patterns to achieve optimum results.

C. Visually inspect the hood exhaust duct throughout its entire length in compliance with authorities having jurisdiction. Begin at the hood connection and end at the point it discharges outdoors. Report findings.

1. Check duct slopes as required. 2. Verify that duct access is installed as required. 3. Verify that point of termination is as required. 4. Verify that duct air velocity is within the range required. 5. Verify that duct is within a fire-rated enclosure.

D. Report deficiencies.

3.16 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST HOODS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each exhaust hood. Measure airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse. If a duct Pitot-tube traverse is not possible, explain why, in the report, and explain the test method used.

B. After balancing is complete, do the following:

1. Measure and record the static pressure at the hood exhaust-duct connection. 2. Check the hood for capture and containment of smoke using a smoke emitting device. Observe

the smoke pattern. Make adjustments to achieve optimum results.

3.17 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second (2.5 to 254 mm/s). 3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils (0.0254 to 2.54 mm). 4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.

B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.

C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.

1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 2. Clear the space of people.

D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is complete.

E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.


PAGE 12 OF 24


F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.

G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp (2.2 kW).

H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.

1. Pumps:

a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Pump Base: Top and side. d. Building: Floor. e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.

2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:

a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

3. Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors:

a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the differences.

J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored. 4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel-to-

solid distance. 5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base below.

Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base and the floor.

3.18 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS

A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.


PAGE 13 OF 24


C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air velocities exceed 100 fpm (0.51 m/s), use a windscreen on the microphone.

D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete.

E. Close windows and doors to the space.

F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.

G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.

H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) above the floor and at least 36 inches (900 mm) from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the measurements.

I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.

J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.

1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on the difference and adjust measurements.

K. Perform sound testing at 4 locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant sound source.

1. Private office. 2. Open office area. 3. Conference room. 4. Assembly hall. 5. Classroom/training room. 6. Each space with a noise criterion of RC or NC 25 or lower. 7. Each space with an indicated noise criterion of RC or NC 35 and lower that is adjacent to a

mechanical equipment room or roof mounted equipment. 8. Inside each mechanical equipment room.

3.19 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.

B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:

1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge flue termination, or vent termination.

2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters. 3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain. 4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal. 5. Evidence of water damage. 6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.

C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following:


PAGE 14 OF 24


1. Most remote area. 2. One location per floor. 3. One location for every 5000 sq. ft. (500 sq. m).

D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:

1. Temperature. 2. Relative humidity. 3. Air velocity. 4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm). 5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm). 6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm). 7. Formaldehyde (ppm).

3.20 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.21 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.


PAGE 15 OF 24


3.22 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.23 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number

each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.


PAGE 16 OF 24


b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.


PAGE 17 OF 24


G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). h. Tube size in NPS (DN). i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C). o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

H. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW). h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C). e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).


PAGE 18 OF 24


f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C). l. Operating set point in Btuh (kW). m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).

I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh (kW). e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


a. Heat output in Btuh (kW). b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number of belts, make, and size.


PAGE 19 OF 24



a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type.



PAGE 20 OF 24


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

N. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Compressor make. e. Compressor model and serial numbers. f. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg). g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F (deg C).


a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). g. Condenser-water temperature differential in deg F (deg C). h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). k. Control settings. l. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa). n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa). o. Suction pressure in psig (kPa). p. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C). q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C). s. Oil pressure in psig (kPa). t. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C). u. Voltage at each connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. Kilowatt input. x. Crankcase heater kilowatt. y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s). bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

O. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service.


PAGE 21 OF 24


d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

P. Boiler Test Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Fuel type and input in Btuh (kW). g. Number of passes. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.


a. Operating pressure in psig (kPa). b. Operating temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS (DN). f. Safety valve settings in psig (kPa). g. High-limit setting in psig (kPa). h. Operating-control setting. i. High-fire set point. j. Low-fire set point. k. Voltage at each connection. l. Amperage for each phase. m. Draft fan voltage at each connection. n. Draft fan amperage for each phase. o. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).


PAGE 22 OF 24


Q. Air-to-Air Heat-Recovery Unit Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. If fans are an integral part of the unit, include the following for each fan:

a. Make and type. b. Arrangement and size. c. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. d. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).


a. Total exhaust airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Purge exhaust airflow rate in cfm (L/s). c. Outside airflow rate in cfm (L/s). d. Total exhaust fan static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Total outside-air fan static pressure in inches wg (Pa). f. Pressure drop on each side of recovery wheel in inches wg (Pa). g. Exhaust air temperature entering in deg F (deg C). h. Exhaust air temperature leaving in deg F (deg C). i. Outside-air temperature entering in deg F (deg C). j. Outside-air temperature leaving in deg F (deg C). k. Calculate sensible and total heat capacity of each airstream in MBh (kW).

R. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test. 2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower. 4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations. 5. Measurement readings for each measurement location. 6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken. 7. Description of predominant vibration source.

S. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:

1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve. 2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number. 4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location. 5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.


PAGE 23 OF 24


6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal. 7. Description of predominant sound source.

T. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation. 2. Date and time of test. 3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test. 4. Room number or similar description for each location. 5. Measurements at each location. 6. Observed deficiencies.

U. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.24 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading

to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect. 3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked.

The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.


PAGE 24 OF 24


3.25 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PAGE 1 OF 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways. 3. Common electrical installation requirements

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, "Suitability of Test Equipment" and "Test Instrument Calibration."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions

and of the working and access space of other equipment. 5. Coordinate with athletic equipment supplied in the field house.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.


PAGE 2 OF 4


C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:


2.2 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch (1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.


PAGE 3 OF 4


3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

D. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

E. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

F. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

G. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

H. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

I. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require a different clearance.

J. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

K. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

L. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

M. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.


PAGE 4 OF 4


B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for damage and faulty work.


SECTION 16072

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PAGE 1 OF 7

02-09-10 SOUTH END SENIOR CENTER IMPROVENTS #09205

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems. 3. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IBC: International Building Code.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

E. Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used.

1. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Professional engineer qualification requirements are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." Include the following:

1. Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 2. Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings.

Include the following:

SECTION 16072



a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3 and in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


A. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: E.

B. Ss, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at Short Periods: 0.274

C. S1, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at 1-Second Period: 0.085.

D. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: C.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where title below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:


SECTION 16072



2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.


a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Finishes:

a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-3. b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-3. c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-3.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

SECTION 16072



a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

H. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

I. Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end.

J. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service.


a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. b. Loos & Co., Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.

3. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod, of design recognized by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

5. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

SECTION 16072



2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.

B. supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing required submittals for component.

D. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

SECTION 16072



5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and seismic criteria at Project.

B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of the base.

2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,

reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

C. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

SECTION 16072



3.5 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Make flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross expansion and seismic-control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to electrical equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices.

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

C. Record test results.


SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PAGE 1 OF 8


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.


PAGE 2 OF 8


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.


PAGE 3 OF 8


D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

3. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES (1220 MM)."

4. Emergency Source Warning: “Warning – Diesel Generator System – Generator set and distribution panel is located ________________(fill in by Contractor).”

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.


PAGE 4 OF 8


2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm).

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. 2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:

a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a primer.

1) Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. 2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):


1) Primer: Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.


PAGE 5 OF 8


2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.

5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):


1) Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.

6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:

a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat(s) over a block filler.

1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

7. Interior Gypsum Board:


1) Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

8. Interior Ferrous Metal:


1) Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):


1) Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. 2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange snap-around label.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, snap-around, color-coding bands:

1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 3. Security System: Blue and yellow. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.


PAGE 6 OF 8


5. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 6. Control Wiring: Green and red.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

4. Coordinate identification with project specification, for system specific identification requirements.

G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer and/or load shedding.

J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.


PAGE 7 OF 8


1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Transformers. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Disconnect switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Motor starters. h. Push-button stations. i. Power transfer equipment. j. Contactors. k. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. l. Battery inverter units. m. Battery racks. n. Power-generating units. o. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. p. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. q. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. r. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and

racks. s. Monitoring and control equipment. t. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and

control functions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at


PAGE 8 OF 8


changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow.

4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting Sections.


SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PAGE 1 OF 6


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.


PAGE 2 OF 6


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN XHHW-2 and SO.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, and Type MC Type SO with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES






PAGE 3 OF 6


2.4 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing

elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


PAGE 4 OF 6


3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor and cu wire with aluminum lugs.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.


PAGE 5 OF 6


I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N.

O. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

a. Emergency Generator Systems.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.


PAGE 6 OF 6


3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

Page 1 OF 10


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.

b. Frame and cover design.

c. Grounding details.

d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

e. Joint details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common

supports.


Page 2 OF 10


D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 6. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Aluminum.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.


Page 3 OF 10


1. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type.

H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. CANTEX Inc. 3. Electri-Flex Co. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 5. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


Page 4 OF 10



1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Hoffman. 4. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 6. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 7. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 10. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load

rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long), depth 30” minimal.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company.


Page 5 OF 10


b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. CDR Systems Corporation.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or frame.


a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. Christy Concrete Products.

d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

2.7 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS





2.8 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing

elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or

manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with

ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.


Page 6 OF 10


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer-concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf (13 345-N) vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. Includes raceways

in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric

Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-EMT. 9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable:

EMT. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp

or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.


Page 7 OF 10


C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from RNC Type EPC-40 or 80-PVC to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 24 inches (600 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m).

2. 1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m). 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless

Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:


Page 8 OF 10


1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of

conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.


A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).


Page 9 OF 10


2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.


Page 10 OF 10


2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES

Page 1 OF 7


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Ceiling occupancy sensors. 4. Wall-box motion sensors. 5. Snap switches. 6. Wall-switch. 7. Pendant cord-connector devices. 8. Cord and plug sets. 9. Floor service outlets, and poke-through assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.




Page 2 OF 7


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). b. Leviton; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). c. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type; self-test diagnostics. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbel; GFR5352ST (Duplex), GFR5350ST (Faceless)

2. Options: Provide “In-use-covers” for exterior GFCI receptacles; Hubbell; WP26m.

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.



Page 3 OF 7


a. Hubbell; HBL2310. b. Leviton; 2310. c. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip. 2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand,

matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.7 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way), HBL1224 (four way).

b. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). c. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three way),

PS20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; HBL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. c. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-RPL for 120 V, PS20ACI-RPL7 for 277V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Hubbell; HBL1221L (single pole), HBL1222L (two pole), HBL1223L (Three way), HBL1224L (Four way).


Page 4 OF 7


b. Leviton; 1221-1L (single pole), 1221-2L (two pole), 1221-3L (three way), 1221-41L (four way).

c. Pass & Seyjmour; PS20AC1-L (single pole), PS20AC2-L (two pole), PS20AC3-L (three way), PS20AC4-L (four way).

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Hubbell; HBL1557. b. Leviton; 1257. c. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.


a. Hubbell; HBL1557L. b. Leviton; 1257L. c. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1227I. b. Leviton; OSSMT-MD.

2. Description: Dual-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, integral photocell, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

B. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP. b. Leviton; OSW12-MOW.

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, Integral photocell, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).

C. Ceiling- Occupancy Sensors:


a. Leviton; OSC20-MOW, OSP20-odo (Power pack), OSA20-roo (add a relay).


Page 5 OF 7


2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, Integral photocell adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 360-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. (111 sq. m).

2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled

for use in "wet locations."

2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

C. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

D. Service Plate: Die-cast aluminum trim.

E. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 6 jacks for UTP cable with communication bracket for floor box.

G. Model #: RFB4-XX-S38CCTCAL. Provide cast iron for on grade and above grade floors.

2.11 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit, detachable matching floor service outlet assembly, and scrub water gasket.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two or four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-45 jacks.

2. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.

3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and reestablish fire

rating of floor. 5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a

minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 6 voice and data communication cables.

C. Model #: RC4ARTTCAL (two-duplex), RC3ARTTCAL (one-duplex).


Page 6 OF 7


2.12 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: As selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG

pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:


Page 7 OF 7


1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or

illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

Page 1 OF 5


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures. 4. Elevator shunt-trip fused disconnect and switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices

and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and s, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


Page 2 OF 5


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.



D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:


Page 3 OF 5


1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Fusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Nonfusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.4 ELEVATOR SHUNT-TRIP FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturer: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. Model - Power Module Switch - PS 2. Substitutions can be submitted for acceptance only if the below requirements are met:

a. The electrical contractor supplies a written request to the engineer three weeks prior to the project bid date.

b. The electrical contractor provides product documentation to prove complete compliance with specification and all pertinent codes and standards require-ments as specified above.

c. The shunt-trip disconnect switch does not incorporate an instantaneous trip mechanism.

Written approval is provided from the engineer.

B. Feeders for multiple elevator installations shall be selective coordinated and fed from a Cooper Bussmann LPJ, LPN-RK/LPS-RK, or KRP-C fuse sized at a minimum of 2:1(compared to the larg-est branch circuit fuse in the elevator shunt-trip fused disconnect switch) in accordance with NEC 620.62.

2.5 CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide shunt-trip fused disconnect switch with all necessary relay(s), control transformer and other options, as shown on drawings and listed below: 1. Ampere rating of the switch shall be based upon the elevator manufacturer requirements

for Cooper Bussmann LPJ fuses. 2. Short-circuit current rating of 200,000A with Cooper Bussmann LPJ fuses. 3. Interlocks to prevent the opening of the cover when the switch is in the ON position. In-

terlock shall be defeatable for testing purposes. 4. Handle lockable in OFF position. 5. 100VA control power transformer with primary and secondary fuses. The primary volt-

age rating shall be 480 volts with a 120V secondary.


Page 4 OF 5


6. Isolation relay (3PDT, 10amp, 120V). The coil of the isolation relay shall be 120V AC. A normally open dry contact shall be provided by the Fire Alarm Safety System to energize the isolation relay and activate the shunt trip solenoid (140VA inrush at 120V).

7. Provide additional options as indicated on drawings or below: a. Key to Test Switch b. “On” Pilot Light Green c. 1P NC Mechanical Interlock (required for hydraulic elevators with

automatic recall). d. Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring Relay (Comply with NFPA 72) e. NEMA 12 Enclosure

8. Entire assembly (including shunt-trip switch, control wiring and accessories) shall have a short-circuit rating of 200,000A.

B. Complete catalog number for the Power Module Switch shall be PSX-TXX-R1-K-G-A-F3-Z.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage

devices complying with manufacturer's certification.


Page 5 OF 5


C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

4. Infrared Scanning:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-Up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each unit 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments, Equipment and Reports:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2) Prepare a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and s included and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches.

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.


SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING

Page 1 OF 7


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors, and emergency transfer relays.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,

outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.


Page 2 OF 7


a. For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4. Other items in finished ceiling including but not limited to the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels.

5. Perimeter moldings.

D. Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps: Specified units installed. 2. Accessories: Cords and plugs.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.




Page 3 OF 7


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other lighting representatives or manufacturers specified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.


Page 4 OF 7


F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; programmed-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 8. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C 82.11 and shall be

connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

C. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.


Page 5 OF 7


2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. 5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize

audible fixture noise.

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. 6. Power Factor: .90 or higher. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 8. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.7 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.


Page 6 OF 7


3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored

after an outage. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of

unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.

B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2950 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 86 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

C. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1350 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 86 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

E. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches (1150 mm), 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).

2.9 HID LAMPS

A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and angle-iron supports.


Page 7 OF 7


B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.11 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. See light fixture schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for

each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.


SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM ADDRESSABLE SYSTEM

Page 1 OF 5


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of intelligent reporting fire alarm devices , to match owners installed system.. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. The fire alarm devices shall comply with requirements of 2002 NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises

Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. . C. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and insist on the highest quality. D. The peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer (or division thereof

and match the existing Fire Alarm Equipment . E. The components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard

as listed herein for fire alarm applications and shall be in compliance with the UL listing. 1.3 SCOPE

A. New fire alarm devices shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.

B. Basic Performance:

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) as part of an addressable device

connected by the SLC Circuit.

3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General:

1. Ten copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to

establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. All devices shall match the existing Fire Alarm System..

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software

modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.

2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire

alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.

1.5 GUARANTY


Page 2 OF 5


A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.

1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards.

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: No. 72-1993 National Fire Alarm Code No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances 3. Local and State Building Codes. 4. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 5. Distributor of fire alarm to be an approved UUJS certified company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The

materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code.

B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'

recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in

place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state

requirements. 2. All wiring shall be installed in conduit to the nearest cable tray location. Conduit fill shall

not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.

3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and

shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29.

4. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar

power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.


Page 3 OF 5


5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted

control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.

6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum. B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new and plenum rated. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760)

and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for notification appliance circuits.

3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use

with a protective signaling system.

4. Wiring used for the SLC multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. In certain applications, the system shall support up to SLC loops with up to 1,000 feet of untwisted, unshielded wire. The system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication loop.

5. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 6. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of t-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4)

Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of t-taps, length of t-taps etc., are not acceptable.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed

category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices

3. All visual units shall be synchronized to meet ADA requirements using sync modules. 2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES A. Addressable Devices - General 1. Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 1 to 16)

type address switches. 2. Addressable devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a Dip switch,

are difficult to install and subject to installation error. This type of device is not an allowable substitute.

3. Detectors shall be intelligent (analog) and addressable, and shall connect with two wires

to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling

LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the LED flash shall have the ability to be removed from the system program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.


Page 4 OF 5


5. Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set in the fire alarm control panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.

6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust

accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.

7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with

tamper proof feature. Base shall include a sounder base with a built-in (local) sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications.

8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition

and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.

9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall

use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 10. Detectors will operate in an analog fashion, where the detector simply measures its

designed environment variable and transmits an analog value to the FACP based on real-time measured values. The FACP software, not the detector, shall make the alarm/normal decision, thereby allowing the sensitivity of each detector to be set in the FACP program and allowing the system operator to view the current analog value of each detector.

11. Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also

store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LEDs shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel.

12. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test each detector for 100% obscuration,

reported to the FACP. 13. Addressable devices shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and

shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. LED(s) shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the device is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel.

14. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test detectors and modules. Detectors shall

report an indication of an analog value reaching 100% of the alarm threshold. B. Addressable Manual Pull Box 1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the

panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key.

2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key

type reset. 3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions

provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches or larger.

4. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shown on the

plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the finished floor.


Page 5 OF 5


5. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/2 inch. This version need not include Style D or an LED.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the

drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and

may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

C. All fire detection and alarm system devices shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas

and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. 3.2 TEST A. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the

manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. Acceptance testing shall be in the presents of the Owner and State Fire Marshal’s Office.

1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short

circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 5. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 6. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 7. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 8. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. 9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the

walk test. 10. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced

on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be

consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION A. At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the manufacturer of the major

equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect. 3.4 INSTRUCTION A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of

the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.


SECTION 3

GENERAL INFORMATION FOR PREPARATION AND DELIVERY OF A RESPONSE

Rev. 050809

Definitions:

Bid or Proposal refers to any form of solicitation the City may use such as a Request for Bids(RFB), Request for Proposals (RFP) or request for Response (RFR).

Candidate or Respondent refers to an individual or company who is considering or hassubmitted a response to a solicitation. This is also commonly referred to as “bidder.”

City refers to the City of Hartford, the Hartford Public Schools and any other governmental entityparticipating in the RFR process and/or resulting award(s).

Provider refers to the Candidate or Candidates who receive an award and who enter into acontract with the City.

Section 3, Page 2

3.1 HOW TO RESPOND: Supply the required information on and along with the responseform. An explicit agent of your organization must sign the response form and anysupplementary proposal document and submit it to the address indicated in Section 1.0 –Response Checklist.

Mark the original response package as "ORIGINAL" on the front cover. We will open theresponse upon receipt if this information is not provided on the face of the envelope. In thiscase the City cannot be held responsible for the confidentiality of the response.

A. Do not wait until the due day to begin to prepare your response. Preparing yourresponse early helps avoid issues related to computer equipment or Internet accessmalfunction. It is the Candidate’s responsibility to ensure that responses are received intheir entirety, on time and at the required location.

B. Reserve

C. A certified check or bid bond, when required, will be specified in the Invitation toRespond and must accompany your response in the amount indicated. Certified checks willbe returned to all unsuccessful Candidates upon the awarding of the contract. Thesuccessful Candidate’s surety shall be held pending receipt of payment and performancebonds and execution of contract.

Bonds may be delivered via an electronic bid bond service such as Surety 2000,(www.surety2000.com) scanned and attached to your on-line submission*, mailed or handdelivered. *If you elect to scan and attach your bond to an on-line submission, the originalsurety documents must be delivered to the address in (F) below within one working day ofthe response deadline.

If your response is not accompanied by a bond, certified check or proof that a valid bondhas been obtained at the RFR opening it may be rejected.

If you manage a small business and have difficulty obtaining bonds (or just haven’t done itbefore) help is available from the Small Business Administration (SBA) through “The SuretyBond Guarantee Program.” One of the bonding companies working with this program isSuggs & Associates in Windsor, CT. For more information go to www.sba.gov, choose“Services.” Then select “Financial Assistance” and click on “Surety Bond.”

D. The successful Candidate may be required to furnish a performance bond and paymentbonds, each for the full contract amount, prior to execution of a contract and/or performanceunder Purchase Orders. Indicate the cost for these bonds, to be added to the contract sumon the response form. For 3.1, C & D:

Surety Companies must be listed on the current Federal Register, licensed in the Stateof Connecticut and have an underwriting limitation exceeding the value of the projectwith no more than 5% of capitol in surplus tied to any one risk.

Banks must have a branch office in Connecticut with insurance provided by the FDIC.

E. The electronic files, from which you printed your hard copy proposal, are to be emailed tothe buyer identified at the bottom of the Invitation to Respond within one hour AFTER thedeadline for submitting hard copy responses. Email transmission of these documents is notencrypted and locked so if you transmit this information before the hard copy response

http://www.surety2000.com/

http://www.sba.gov/

Section 3, Page 3

deadline it may be viewed prematurely. The City is not responsible for the confidentiality ofinformation transmitted via fax, email or other electronic means.

You may convert Word documents to pdf files (in fact we would prefer this). Excelworksheets however may not be submitted as pdf files.

The purpose of submitting these files is to reduce duplicate data entry and shorten the timeneeded for City staff to create the response summary. These electronic files will not serveas a substitute for the hard copy response that must be submitted by the RFR deadline.

Failure to follow these guidelines may be just cause for rejection of the response.

3.2 CORRECTION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS; CANCELLATION OF AWARDS. Correctionor withdrawal of inadvertently erroneous bids, including corrections to pricing if the accurateprice can be derived from the bid response submitted prior to the bid deadline, before or afteraward, or cancellation of awards of Contracts or Purchase Orders based on such mistakes,shall be permitted with the approval, in writing, of the Procurement Manager.

3.3 QUANTITIES AND/OR USAGES: Quantities and/or usages are estimates only and in noway represent a commitment and/or intent to purchase the estimated amount. Actual quantitiesand delivery points may vary. The City reserves the right to order all quantities that may beneeded, at the contract price, during the contract term regardless of the estimates provided inthis RFR.

3.4 QUESTIONS & ADDENDA: Supplementary information, if issued, will be placed on theState of Connecticut, DAS websitehttp://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Home.asp. Candidates are responsible forobtaining all addenda related to this RFR. Candidates are advised to check for any addenda aminimum of twenty-four hours in advance of the response deadline.

Questions related to this project must be received in writing 72 hours in advance of theresponse submittal deadline. We strongly recommend that prospective Candidates reviewspecifications early in the solicitation process and submit all questions at one time. Writtenquestions are to be sent to the buyer whose name appears on the invitation to bid via email.

Responses shall be in writing, posted, in the form of an addendum on the State of Connecticut,DAS website http://www.das.state.ct.us/Purchase/Portal/Portal_Home.asp.

All communications related to this project are to be directed through the Department managingthe RFR. This is the Department listed for receipt of responses in Section 1.0. In most casesthis will be the Procurement Services Department. Candidates found to be communicating withCity or School staff outside of Procurement Services (or the Department indicated in Section1.0) will have their response rejected. The City of Hartford, the Public Schools, or its agentsshall not be responsible for any oral instructions or interpretations given to a Candidate.

3.5 CRITERIA FOR AWARD: This Request for Response (RFR) does not necessarilycontemplate an award based solely on price. Rather, the City reserves its rights to accept orreject any or all responses or any portion thereof that it may determine to be in its own bestinterests, for whatever reason.

3.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF CANDIDATES OFFERING A RESPONSE: The City may makesuch investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the Candidate to performthe work and the degree to which any Candidate meets the criteria for award listed herein.



Section 3, Page 4

Each Candidate agrees to furnish the City any additional information requested.

If this RFR is set-aside for award to a small, minority or women owned business enterprise youmust receive certification prior to award. This program is described in Sec. 2-660 of theHartford Municipal Code and can be found at:http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm. Qualified business, not currently certified,may obtain application forms from:http://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/ohr2.0/MWBE%20Certification.htm.

3.7 THE REQUEST FOR RESPONSE (RFR) PROCESS: Solicitations are advertised asrequired by law. The City may also send invitations to businesses as it deems appropriate.Placement on a vendor mailing list or a history of having received invitations in the past orhaving received prior contract awards in no way obligates the City to continue any form of directnotification. At the discretion of the Procurement Manager the City may remove vendors fromthe mailing list for whatever reason including a poor performance history or failure to respond toprevious invitations.

3.8 CONTRACTING: The City reserves the right to require the successful Candidate toexecute a contract in a format supplied by the City. The terms and conditions of the contract tobe signed upon the award of the RFR will supersede any inconsistent provision of the RFRdocuments. If the Candidate receiving a full or partial award fails to execute a contract asrequired, they shall be liable for, and agree to pay, on demand, the difference between the pricebid and the price for which such contract is subsequently re-awarded, including theadministrative cost of reissuing the contract. These costs will be recovered through the bidbond, if submitted, and any remaining sums due will be paid by the Candidate.

The award of any contract is subject to the following conditions and contingencies:

(a) The approval of such governmental agencies as may be required by law.(b) The appropriation of adequate funds by the proper agencies.(c) Compliance with all applicable laws, regulation, ordinances and codes of the United

States, the State of Connecticut and the City of Hartford. Sections of Hartford’s Codewhich are most often applicable such as Living Wage for services and Set-asideprogram for Small and Minority business enterprises are posted at:http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm. The entire City Code is available atoff the City’s Home page: http://www.hartford.gov.

(d) The selected Candidate must be current in all tax or any other monetary obligation owedto the City of Hartford.

(e) The selected Candidate must have a current EEO certification (see section 3.10) on filewith the City.

(f) If the Candidate is a corporation or other legal business entity, it must have a currentlicense to do business in the State of Connecticut that is on file with the ConnecticutSecretary of State's office, or it must be organized under the laws of the State ofConnecticut and current in terms of its required filings.

In the event the intention of this bid is to create a term contract for on-call construction servicesand unless otherwise indicated, the duration of the Contract will be one (1) year. Further,Contract terms may be negotiated on award anniversaries. City Ordinance Sec 2-558 (C)allows for a maximum of three Contract extensions provided that the funds are available,approved by the City for this purpose and that the Contractor has established a satisfactoryperformance record.


http://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/ohr2.0/MWBE Certification.htm


http://www.municode.com/resources/gateway.asp?pid=10895&sid=7

Section 3, Page 5

Notwithstanding the failure of City to exercise any option to renew this contract for an additionalyear, the Managing Authority reserves the right to unilaterally extend this contract on a month tomonth basis for a period not to exceed three (3) months under the same terms and conditionsapplicable to the preceding contract period.

3.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract documents consist of the Agreement betweenOwner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), this Request for Response (RFR) and itsreferenced documents, General and Supplementary Conditions, drawings, any Addenda issued,the Contractor’s response to the RFR, other documents listed in the Agreement andModifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendmentto the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directiveor (4) a written order for a Minor change in the Work issued by the Design Professional onbehalf of the City; the Contract Documents do include other documents such as biddingrequirements.

3.10 OBLIGATIONS OF THE CANDIDATE: At the time of the opening of proposals, eachCandidate will be presumed to be thoroughly familiar with the City's requirements, and theobjectives for each element of the project, item or service. A plea of mistake in the acceptedresponse shall not be available to the Candidate for the recovery of the bid surety or as adefense to any action based upon an accepted response.

3.11 REQUIRED FORMS:

a) Candidate’s EEO Report: As a condition of doing business with the City the selectedrespondent must be certified by the City as an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer.Certifications must be renewed annually. If your firm is not currently certified you maydown load and complete the required forms from:http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm. Submit completed forms with yourresponse. To check the current status of your EEO certification contact the Office of HumanRelations, 860.757.9785, fax 860.722.6486 or email: [email protected].

If your company employs four (4) or more people, please submit your EEO Policy Statementwith your Response.

b) Taxpayer's Identification Number: Every respondent must provide their TaxpayerIdentification Number on the response form. Award recipients, whether an individual,proprietor, partnership or a non-profit corporation or organization must file the InternalRevenue Service Form W-9, Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certificationwith the City.

3.12 SITE INSPECTION: Information contained in these documents is provided in good faithonly that all Candidates may have access to the same information utilized by the City, and is notintended as a substitute for personal investigations, interpretations and judgment of theCandidate. As information may be approximated or incomplete, Candidates should conduct athorough inspection or study of existing conditions/equipment. Any discrepancy, or need forclarification must be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to the bid opening.

Submission of a bid shall be evidence that the Candidate has examined the site, compared itwith the drawings and specifications and satisfied itself of the conditions existing at the site, thestorage and handling of materials, and all other matters incidental to the work under thiscontract.


Section 3, Page 6

No additional compensation will be allowed for difficulties which the Candidate could havediscovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding.

3.13 PREVAILING WAGES: Pursuant to Section 2-559 (B), Required Provisions. EachAgreement for the construction, remodeling or repair of any Infrastructure Facilities shall containboth of the following provisions:

(1) "The wages paid to any mechanic, laborer or workman employed upon the workherein contracted to be done shall be at a rate equal to the prevailing wage rate in the State ofConnecticut and or federal government, whichever is applicable, for the same work in the sametrade or occupation."

(2) "Each contractor and subcontractor, or an authorized officer or employee,responsible for supervision of the payment of wages shall submit, on a weekly basis withinseven (7) days after the regular payment date of the payroll period, to the Director of the Officeof Human Relations of the City, a "Weekly Certified Statement of Compliance." Due and timelycompliance with this provision shall be a condition precedent to the approval and transmittal ofthe next and succeeding payments by the city or its authorized officers or agents to thecontractor under the terms of this agreement."

3.14 RETAINAGE: When progress payments are being made for items being built ordesigned, the City may retain 5% of the total project cost until such time as a satisfactoryguarantee bond, if required, is posted with the City, or other terms for retainage, as may bespecified in the contract for this project, are met.

3.15 ACCEPTABLE BRANDS: The RFR specifications are not intended to limit considerationto the particular service organization or manufacturer from which they were developed.References to brand names or numbers are to be interpreted as establishing a standard ofquality and is not to be construed as limiting competition. Brand names used within thesespecifications shall be presumed to be followed by the words "or approved equal".

Burden of proving a product and/or material as equal to a specific product and/or material bybrand name is the responsibility of the Provider.

Final determination as to what is an "or equal" product will be made by the ProcurementManager in conjunction with other City staff. The City will award on the basis of the criteriastated herein, and reserves the right to waive or require compliance with any element of thespecifications.

3.16 SAMPLES: Samples are furnished free of charge and may be held for comparison withdeliveries. Candidate must arrange for their return if desired.

Samples are assumed to meet, at a minimum, City specifications for quality. All deliveries shallhave at least the same quality as the accepted proposal sample. Latent deficiencies will beremedied by the contractor at no additional cost, or loss of service, to the City.

3.17 RESPONSE DEVELOPMENT: Candidates are responsible for all costs and expensesincurred in the preparation of a response and for any subsequent work on the response that isrequired by the City of Hartford. Any submittal is the property of the City of Hartford and will notbe returned.

3.18 REGISTERING WITH THE SECRETARY OF STATE: Generally a foreign (meaning out

Section 3, Page 7

of State) corporation or LLC must file with the Secretary of State Office to do business in thestate. Foreign Corporations should review Sect. 33-920 of the Connecticut General Statutes. Ifthey do not find that the exemptions apply to them they must file a "Certificate of Authority."

Foreign LLC's are covered under Sections 34-222 to 34-236. If the exemptions (in 34-235) donot apply to them they must file a "Certification of Registration."

Companies may obtain forms and more information from the Secretary of the State web sitelocated at: http://www.sots.ct.gov/CommercialRecording/Crdindex.html. Their number is860.509.6002.

The State of Connecticut General Statutes can be found at:http://search.cga.state.ct.us/dtsearch_pub_statutes.html. Enter the section number with hyphenand in the "In Database(s)" window select "Statutes - Section text."

3.19 TIME PROVISIONS: The content of any response submitted is to remain valid andavailable to the City for ninety (90) days from the day proposals are due.

3.20. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL BONDThe successful contractor will be required to submit a Performance Bond and Payment Bond inthe amount of 100% of contract award within 10 days of award. Said bonds shall be issued byan Insurance Company and said surety companies must be listed on the current FederalRegister, licensed in the State of Connecticut with an underwriting limitation exceeding the valueof the project with no more than 5% of capital in surplus tied to any one risk.

3.21. INSURANCEList the name and address of the bidder’s insurance agent as part of the bid. The successfulContractor shall be required to furnish insurance coverage, acceptable to the City, within ten(10) days from notice of award and must name the City as an additional insured on the face ofthe document. The City's standard insurance requirements are available athttp://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm. Download document #1007_ConstructionInsurance Requirements.

3.22 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONThe Contractor understands that during the course of and at the conclusion of the project thatthe City will evaluate his/her overall performance. Based on information gathered from theCity’s project management team, the Procurement Manager will assess factors including, butnot limited to, quality of work or service, completion record, job supervision, working relationshipwith other providers, bills for extras, organization, cooperation, worksite cleanliness andcompliance with City MBE requirements. The contractor further understands and agrees thatthis record will be available for public scrutiny both in the project file and on the City’s websitefor a minimum of two years. The contractor will not contest the Procurement Manager’s scoringwhich will be final.

3.23 SUBCONTRACTORSThe Bidder shall not subcontract any portion of the project to be performed unless the priorconsent of the City is given for both the work to be subcontracted and the subcontractor toperform the same. The terms and conditions of the underlying contract between the City andContractor will become part and parcel of the terms and conditions of each subcontract. Theidentities of subcontractors will be submitted after the bid opening.For the Lump Sum Bid:

Bidders are required to indicate in the space provided on the response form:

http://www.sots.ct.gov/CommercialRecording/Crdindex.html

http://search.cga.state.ct.us/dtsearch_pub_statutes.html


Section 3, Page 8

a. The nature of work to be performed by each subcontractor;b. The subcontractor’s business namec. The dollar amount of the individual subcontract included in the base bid;d. The percentage of the value of the subcontract to the base bid;e. If the subcontractor is a woman / minority business enterprise currently certified by

the City of Hartford.For the Alternates:Identify the information outlined in 3.23 a-e for any alternate bid item(s) separately.

3.24. MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION (MBE)Bidders are required to set-aside for Minority Businesses the portion of work specified in the“Construction Contract Summary” sheet located behind the cover sheet for this bid. Bidders areencouraged to exceed the set-aside requirement specified. The City's Minority Business listingas further described in section 3.6 shall be used by Bidders in selecting minority businesscontractors.

The sum of all minority business subcontracts shall be equal to or greater than the percentagespecified in the “Construction Contract Summary Sheet” regardless of how the bid is awarded(base only or base plus one or more alternates). Failure to comply with the required percentageof minority business utilization will be cause for rejection of bid.When alternate bid items are included in the proposal, the “Subcontractor UtilizationCommitment” form should be completed separately for each alternate bid item.

3.24.1 City Certification RequiredBidders shall utilize Minority subcontractors who hold a current certification by the City ofHartford. Certifications by any other government entity shall not be sufficient to qualify thesubcontractor to participate in the City of Hartford's minority business utilization preferenceprogram. In selecting its minority subcontractors, Bidder is cautioned to seek documented proofthat its subcontractors hold valid certification by the City. Failure to identify City certifiedMinority Business subcontractors will be cause for rejection of bid.

3.24.2 Percentage of Work to be PerformedDesignated MBE’s shall perform at least 70% of the work with their own forces and as part oftheir own operations excluding the manufacture or purchase of proprietary products.

3.24.3. Minority Business ListingA listing of Minority Businesses holding certification by the City of Hartford is available athttp://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/regreportreformat.pdf or in the Office of HumanRelations, 550 Main Street, Hartford, CT 06103. The City’s listing of minority businesses iscomprised of companies whereby at least 51% of the company is owned and operated by oneor more of the following group persons: Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Women, AsianPacific Americans, Pacific Islanders, American Indians and descendants from the IberianPeninsula. It should be understood that such listings are made available to assist Bidders insatisfying bid requirements; however, Bidder's selection of a subcontractor is its soleresponsibility and all work performed under the contract shall be Bidder's sole responsibility.The City does not sponsor or recommend the selection of any one vendor. Certification by theCity of Hartford as a minority business does not imply that the business is qualified to performthe work specified in this bid. The City reserves the right to request alternate minoritysubcontractors for whatever reason.

3.24.4. Proof of Minority Business Utilization RequiredPrior to award of contract, the successful Bidder shall be required to file with the City Engineer

http://www.hartford.gov/human_relations/regreportreformat.pdf

Section 3, Page 9

the actual form of subcontract with subcontractor(s) named in at least the minimum dollar valueas stated in the "Subcontractor Utilization Commitment" form. The subcontract shall state thepercentage of work which will be performed by the MBE with its own forces and as part of itsoperation. Failure to comply with proof of subcontract within 10 days of notification may result inthe rejection of bid and may be cause for forfeiture of Bidders' bid surety. Further, the Cityreserves the right to monitor the performance and payment of such subcontracts; therefore,upon request by the City, the successful Bidder shall be required to furnish proof of payment toits subcontractors. Failure to comply with such monitoring requirements within ten days ofwritten request will result in the withholding of payment to Bidder

3.24.5 Changes in Subcontractors after AwardThe successful Bidder may not change subcontractor(s) after the contract has been let unlessand until it has received written approval from the City of Hartford. Any such approval shall bebased upon a written request by the Contractor or City, which details performance and/or otherissues related to the subcontractor(s).

3.25 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY/AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS

General Information3.25.1 The successful Bidder, as a condition of being awarded this contract shall agree tocomply with all contractual Equal Employment Opportunity/Affirmative Action performancerequirements as outlined herein. All contractors, sub-contractors, vendors, and labor referralorganizations must, as a condition of their participation upon city of Hartford capital constructionprojects, comply with the provisions of “Chapter 2, Article XII” of the Municipal Code and the“Greater Hartford Affirmative Action Plan” established pursuant thereto. All Bidders are directedto the Proposal section wherein special bid submittal items related to this section are outlined.3.25.2 The successful Bidder, as requirement of final contract execution will additionallyagree to comply with the following provisions:

a. Sign and submit the document entitled “Equal Employment Opportunity Agreementand Certificate Pursuant To The Execution of a Contract With the City of Hartford,Connecticut”.b. Sign and submit the document entitled “Affidavit For Becoming Signatory to theGreater Hartford Affirmative Action Plan”.c. Submit a report of current company employment statistics on the included form. (SeeBidding Requirements/Bid Proposald. Submit a copy of company “Equal Employment Opportunity Policy Statement”properly signed by Company official on company letterhead.e. Submit an agreement to notify the Hartford Commission on Human Relations as toall employment openings occurring with the company during the pendency of this contractunless otherwise expressly prohibited by collective bargaining agreement (such agreementsmust be so identified where they exist).These forms are available on-line at http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm ifnot included in the Sample Form section.

3.25.3 The successful Bidder further agrees that the requirements as noted in paragraphs3.25.2, a-e shall likewise apply to all on site construction sub-contractors.

3.25.4 Prior to contract award, the City of Hartford reserves the right to review a Biddersqualifications and ability to comply with the equal employment opportunity/affirmative actionprogram requirements as contained in this bid document.3.25.5 During the Performance of this contract, the contractor will agree to permitauthorized City of Hartford staff to perform on-site project monitoring related to the contractual


Section 3, Page 10

equal employment opportunity/affirmative action performance requirements. The primecontractor, additionally agrees on behalf of his/her company and all subcontractors to submit thefollowing reports during while performing under this contract:

a. Payroll Certification Form within 10 working days of end of reporting month.b. Minority/Women Business Enterprise (M/WBE) Payment Status Reports (whereapplicable) upon request by the Commission on Human Relations.c. Status reports as to special training and/or employment residency requirements(where applicable) upon prescribed forms.

3.25.6 The successful Bidder shall agree that neither he/she nor any subcontractors willdischarge, expel or otherwise discriminate against any person because he/she has opposedany unfair employment practice or because he/she has filed a complaint or testified or assistedin any proceeding under Section 31-127 of the Connecticut State Statutes. The advertisementof employment opportunities shall be carried out in such manner as not to restrict suchemployment so as to discriminate against individuals because of their race, creed, color, age,sex, national origin, physical or mental handicap, religion, or sexual orientation except in thecase of a bona fide occupational qualification or need.

3.26. EEO/AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REPORTAs a condition of doing business with the City the selected Bidder must be certified by the Cityas an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Certifications must be renewed annually. Ifyour firm is not currently certified you may obtain the required forms on-line at:http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/documents.htm and submit completed forms with yourresponse.Note that the EEO form contains the Hartford Affirmative Action Plan. The terms and conditionsof the Plan are an integral part of the Standard Contract between the City and successfulBidder. A sample report form is included in the “Sample Forms” section of this document. Tocheck the current status of your EEO certification contact the Office of Human Relations,860.757.9785, fax 860.722.6486 or email: [email protected].

3.26.1 Monthly Employment Utilization ReportThe successful Bidder shall be required to submit a "Monthly Employment Utilization Report,"(the form is provided in this Request for Bid). Bidder agrees to the following goals:· a minimum of 15% of the total project hours by trade shall be allocated to minority workers.· a goal of 50% of the total project hours by trade allocated to minority workers.· a Hartford resident employment goal of 30% by trade.

The EEO Report (available at: http://www.hartford.gov/purchasing/Documents.htm), togetherwith the Monthly Employment Utilization report submitted by Contractor will be used todetermine compliance with this Affirmative Action Plan. Contractor understands and agrees thatits failure to achieve and maintain the minimum minority participation stated herein will beconsidered a breach of contract.

Specific instructions for completing this form are provided directly on the back of the form. Theform shall be submitted to the Human Relations Director, Municipal Building, 550 Main Street,Hartford, CT 06103. Extra copies of the form or assistance in completing the form may be hadbe calling or visiting the office of the Human Relations Director. It is imperative that this form besubmitted on time; failure to do so will be grounds for the City's withholding of all furtherpayments until the forms are received.

END OF SECTION



LABOR COMPLIANCE

Project: South End Senior Center Improvements

Minimum Rates and Classifications for Building Construction B 13171 Connecticut Department of Labor Wage and Workplace Standards Division By virtue of the authority vested in the Labor Commissioner under provisions of Section 31-53 of the General Statutes of Connecticut, as amended, the following are declared to be the prevailing rates and welfare payments and will apply only where the contract is advertised for bid within 20 days of the date on which the rates are established. Any contractor or subcontractor not obligated by agreement to pay to the welfare and pension fund shall pay this amount to each employee as part of his/her hourly wages.

Project Number F08-14 Project Town Hartford State#: FAP# Project: South End Senior Center Improvements

CLASSIFICATION Hourly Rate Benefits 1a) Asbestos Worker/Insulator (Includes application of insulating 34.21 19.81 materials, protective coverings, coatings, & finishes to all types of mechanical systems; application of firestopping material for wall openings & penetrations in walls, floors, ceilings - Last updated 9/1/08

1b) Asbestos/Toxic Waste Removal Laborers: Asbestos removal and encapsulation (except its removal from mechanical systems which are not to be scrapped), toxic waste removers, blasters.**See Laborers Group 7**

2) Boilermaker 34.94 19.00

As of: Friday, January 29, 2010


3a) Bricklayer, Cement Mason, Concrete Finisher (including 32.18 20.44 + a caulking), Stone Masons

3b) Tile Setter 30.78 16.98

3c) Terrazzo Workers, Marble Setters - Last updated 10/1/08 30.91 19.12

3d) Tile, Marble & Terrazzo Finishers 24.90 14.78

3e) Plasterer 32.18 20.44

------LABORERS------



4) Group 1: Laborers (common or general), carpenter tenders, 24.25 14.45 wrecking laborers, fire watchers.

4a) Group 2: Mortar mixers, plaster tender, power buggy operators, 24.50 14.45 powdermen, fireproofer/mixer/nozzleman, fence erector.

4b) Group 3: Jackhammer operators, mason tender (brick) and mason 24.75 14.45 tender (cement/concrete)

4c) **Group 4: Pipelayers (Installation of water, storm drainage or 25.25 14.45 sewage lines outside of the building line with P6, P7 license) (the pipelayer rate shall apply only to one or two employees of the total crew who primary task is to actually perform the mating of pipe sections)[If using this classification call the Labor Department for clarification] Last updated 4/8/09

4d) Group 5: Air track operators, Sand blasters - Last updated 4/8/09 25.00 14.45

4e) Group 6: Nuclear toxic waste removers, blasters - Last updated 27.25 14.45 4/8/09



4f) Group 7: Asbestos removal and encapsulation (except it's 25.25 14.45 removal from mechanical systems which are not to be scrapped) - Last updated 4/5/09

4g) Group 8: Bottom men on open air caisson, cylindrical work and 24.75 14.45 boring crew - Last updated 4/8/09

4h) Group 9: Top men on open air caisson, cylindrical work and 24.25 14.45 boring crew - Last updated 4/8/09

5) Carpenter, Acoustical Ceiling Installation, Soft Floor/Carpet 29.00 17.80 Laying, Metal Stud Installation, Form Work and Scaffold Building, Drywall Hanging, Modular-Furniture Systems Installers, Lathers, Piledrivers, Resilient Floor Layers.

5a) Millwrights 29.75 17.80

6) Electrical Worker (including low voltage wiring) (Trade License 35.40 19.51 required: E1,2 L-5,6 C-5,6 T-1,2 L-1,2 V-1,2,7,8,9)



7a) Elevator Mechanic (Trade License required: R-1,2,5,6) 42.34 18.285+a+b

-----LINE CONSTRUCTION----

Groundman 22.67 6.50% + 6.20

Linemen/Cable Splicer 41.22 6.5% + 12.20

8) Glazier (Trade License required: FG-1,2) 31.73 14.55 + a

9) Ironworker, Ornamental, Reinforcing, Structural, and Precast 32.75 25.08 + a Concrete Erection



----OPERATORS----

Group 1: Crane handling or erecting structural steel or stone, 34.05 17.75 + a hoisting engineer 2 drums or over, front end loader (7 cubic yards or over); work boat 26 ft. and over. (Trade License Required)

Group 2: Cranes (100 ton rate capacity and over); 33.73 17.75 + a Backhoe/Excavator over 2 cubic yards; Piledriver ($3.00 premium when operator controls hammer). (Trade License Required)

Group 3: Excavator, Backhoe/Excavator under 2 cubic yards; Cranes 32.99 17.75 + a (under 100 ton rated capacity), Grader/Blade; Master Mechanic; Hoisting Engineer (all types of equipment where a drum and cable are used to hoist or drag material regardless of motive power of operation), Rubber Tire Excavator (Drott-1085 or similar);Grader Operator; Bulldozer Fine Grade. (slopes, shaping, laser or GPS, etc.).

Group 4: Trenching Machines; Lighter Derrick; Concrete Finishing 32.60 17.75 + a Machine; CMI Machine or Similar; Koehring Loader (Skooper).

Group 5: Specialty Railroad Equipment; Asphalt Paver; Asphalt 32.01 17.75 + a Reclaiming Machine; Line Grinder; Concrete Pumps; Drills with Self Contained Power Units; Boring Machine; Post Hole Digger; Auger; Pounder; Well Digger; Milling Machine (over 24" Mandrell)



Group 5 continued: Side Boom; Combination Hoe and Loader; 32.01 17.75 + a Directional Driller.

Group 6: Front End Loader (3 up to 7 cubic yards); Bulldozer (rough 31.70 17.75 + a grade dozer).

Group 7: Asphalt roller, concrete saws and cutters (ride on types), 31.36 17.75 + a vermeer concrete cutter, Stump Grinder; Scraper; Snooper; Skidder; Milling Machine (24" and under Mandrell).

Group 8: Mechanic, grease truck operator, hydroblaster; barrier 30.96 17.75 + a mover; power stone spreader; welding; work boat under 26 ft.; transfer machine.

Group 9: Front end loader (under 3 cubic yards), skid steer loader 30.53 17.75 + a regardless of attachments, (Bobcat or Similar): forklift, power chipper; landscape equipment (including Hydroseeder).

Group 10: Vibratory hammer; ice machine; diesel and air, hammer, 28.49 17.75 + a etc.



Group 11: Conveyor, earth roller, power pavement breaker 28.49 17.75 + a (whiphammer), robot demolition equipment.

Group 12: Wellpoint operator. 28.43 17.75 + a

Group 13: Compressor battery operator. 27.85 17.75 + a

Group 14: Elevator operator; tow motor operator (solid tire no rough 26.71 17.75 + a terrain).

Group 15: Generator Operator; Compressor Operator; Pump 26.30 17.75 + a Operator; Welding Machine Operator; Heater Operator.

Group 16: Maintenance Engineer/Oiler. 25.65 17.75 + a



Group 17: Portable asphalt plant operator; portable crusher plant 29.96 17.75 + a operator; portable concrete plant operator.

Group 18: Power safety boat; vacuum truck; zim mixer; sweeper; 27.54 17.75 + a (Minimum for any job requiring a CDL license).

------PAINTERS (Including Drywall Finishing)------

10a) Brush, Roller 28.17 14.55

10b) Taper/Drywall Finisher 28.92 14.55

10c) Paperhanger 28.67 14.55



10e) Spray 31.17 14.55

11) Plumber (excluding HVAC pipe installation) (Trade License 36.32 21.26 required: P-1,2,6,7,8,9 J-1,2,3,4 SP-1,2)

12) Post Digger, Well Digger, Pile Testing Machine 32.01 17.75 + a

13) Roofer (composition) 31.10 14.46

14) Roofer (slate & tile) 31.60 14.46

15) Sheetmetal Worker (Trade License required for HVAC and 31.57 25.92 Ductwork: SM-1,SM-2,SM-3,SM-4,SM-5,SM-6)



16) Pipefitter (Including HVAC work) 36.32 21.26 (Trade License required: S-1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 B-1,2,3,4 D-1,2,3,4, G-1, G-2, G-8 & G-9)

------TRUCK DRIVERS------

17a) 2 Axle 26.98 13.48 + a

17b) 3 Axle, 2 Axle Ready Mix 27.08 13.48 + a

17c) 3 Axle Ready Mix 27.13 13.48 + a

17d) 4 Axle, Heavy Duty Trailer up to 40 tons 27.18 13.48 + a



17e) 4 Axle Ready Mix 27.23 13.48 + a

17f) Heavy Duty Trailer (40 Tons and Over) 27.43 13.48 + a

17g) Specialized Earth Moving Equipment (Other Than Conventional 27.23 13.48 + a Type on-the-Road Trucks and Semi-Trailers, Including Euclids)

18) Sprinkler Fitter (Trade License required: F-1,2,3,4) 40.30 16.25 + a



Welders: Rate for craft to which welding is incidental. *Note: Hazardous waste removal work receives additional $1.25 per hour for truck drivers. **Note: Hazardous waste premium $3.00 per hour over classified rate Crane with 150 ft. boom (including jib) - $1.50 extra Crane with 200 ft. boom (including jib) - $2.50 extra Crane with 250 ft. boom (including jib) - $5.00 extra Crane with 300 ft. boom (including jib) - $7.00 extra Crane with 400 ft. boom (including jib) - $10.00 extra All classifications that indicate a percentage of the fringe benefits must be calculated at the percentage rate times the "base hourly rate".

Apprentices duly registered under the Commissioner of Labor's regulations on "Work Training Standards for Apprenticeship and Training Programs" Section 31-51-d-1 to 12, are allowed to be paid the appropriate percentage of the prevailing journeymen hourly base and the full fringe benefit rate, providing the work site ratio shall not be less than one full-time journeyperson instructing and supervising the work of each apprentice in a specific trade.

The Prevailing wage rates applicable to this project are subject to annual adjustments each July 1st for the duration of the project. Each contractor shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect each July 1st, as posted by the Department of Labor. It is the contractor's responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate increases directly from the Department of Labor's website. The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor's Web page: www.ct.gov/dol The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate schedule to the Contracting Agency for the project. All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractor access.



Effective October 1, 2005 - Public Act 05-50: any person performing the work of any mechanic, laborer, or worker shall be paid prevailing wage All Person who perform work ON SITE must be paid prevailing wage for the appropriate mechanic, laborer, or worker classification. All certified payrolls must list the hours worked and wages paid to All Persons who perform work ON SITE regardless of their ownership i.e.: (Owners, Corporate Officers, LLC Members, Independent Contractors, et. al) Reporting and payment of wages is required regardless of any contractual relationship alleged to exist between the contractor and such person.

~~Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clause (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

Please direct any questions which you may have pertaining to classification of work and payment of prevailing wages to the Wage and Workplace Standards Division, telephone (860)263-6790.


Information Bulletin Occupational Classifications

The Connecticut Department of Labor has the responsibility to properly determine "job

classification" on prevailing wage projects covered under C.G.S. Section 31‐53.

Note: This information is intended to provide a sample of some occupational classifications for guidance purposes only. It is not an all‐inclusive list of each occupation's duties. This list is being provided only to highlight some areas where a contractor may be unclear regarding the proper classification.

Below are additional clarifications of specific job duties performed for certain classifications:

Asbestos Insulator

• Handle, install, apply, fabricate, distribute, prepare, alter, repair, or dismantle heat and frost insulation, including penetration and fire stopping work on all penetration fire stop systems.

Carpenter

• Assembly and installation of modular fumiture/fumiture systems. [New] a. Free‐standing furniture is not covered. This includes: student chairs, study top desks, book box desks, computer furniture, dictionary stand, atlas stand, wood shelving, two‐ position information access station, file cabinets, storage cabinets, tables, etc.

• Applies fire stopping materials on fire resistive joint systems only. • Installation of insulated material of all types whether blown, nailed or attached

in other ways to walls, ceilings and floors of buildings. • Installation of curtain/window walls only where attached to wood or metal

studs.

Cleaning Laborer

• The clean up of any construction debris and the general cleaning, including sweeping, wash down, mopping, wiping of the construction facility, washing, polishing, dusting, etc., prior to the issuance of a certificate of occupancy falls under the Labor classification.

Delivery Personnel (Revised)

• If delivery of supplies/building materials is to one common point and stockpiled there, prevailing wages are not required. If the delivery personnel are involved in the distribution of the material to multiple locations within the construction site then they would have to be paid prevailing wages for the type of work performed: laborer, equipment operator, electrician, ironworker, plumber, etc.

• An example of this would be where delivery of drywall is made to a building and the delivery personnel distribute the drywall from one "stockpile" location to further sub‐locations on each floor. Distribution of material around a construction site is the job of a laborer/tradesman and not a delivery personnel.

Electrician

• Installation or maintenance of telecommunication, LAN wiring or computer equipment.

• Low voltage wiring.

Fork Lift Operator

• Laborers Group 4) Mason Tenders ‐ operates forklift solely to assist a mason to a maximum height of nine (9) feet only.

• Power Equipment Operator Group 9 ‐ operates forklift to assist any trade, and to assist a mason to a height over nine (9) feet.

Glaziers

• Installs light metal sash, head sills, and 2‐story aluminum storefronts. • Installation of aluminum window walls and curtain walls is the 'Soidtwork of the

Glaziers and Ironworkers classification which requires either a blended rate or equal composite workforce.

Ironworkers

• Handling, sorting, and installation of reinforcing steel (rebar). • Installation of aluminum window walls and curtain walls is the "joint work" of

the Glaziers and Ironworkers classification which requires either a blended rate or equal composite workforce. Insulated metal and insulated composite panels are still installed by the Ironworker.

• Metal bridge rail (traffic), metal bridge handrail, and decorative security fence installation.

Insulator

• Installing fire stopping systems/materials for "Penetration Firestop Systems": transit to cables, electrical conduits, insulated pipes, sprinkler pipe penetrations, ductwork behind radiation, electrical cable trays, fire rated pipe penetrations, natural polypropylene, HVAC ducts, plumbing bare metal, telephone and communication wires, and boiler room ceilings. Past practice using the applicable licensed trades, Plumber, Sheet Metal, Sprinkler Fitter, and Electrician, is not inconsistent with the Insulator classification and would be permitted.

Lead Paint Removal

• Painter Rate 1. Removal of lead paint from bridges. 2. Removal of lead paint as preparation of any surface to be repainted. 3. Where removal is on a Demolition project prior to reconstruction.

• Laborer Rate 1. Removal of lead paint from any surface NOT to be repainted. 2. Where removal is on a TOTAL Demolition project only.

Roofers

• Preparation of surface, tear‐off and/or removal of any type of roofing, and/or clean‐up of any areas where a roof is to be relaid.

Sheet Metal Worker

• Fabrication, handling, assembling, erecting, altering, repairing, etc. of coated metal material panels and composite metal material panels when used on building exteriors and interiors as soffits, facia, louvers, partitions, wall panel siding, canopies, cornice, column covers, awnings, beam covers, cladding, sun shades, lighting troughs, spires, ornamental roofing, metal ceilings, mansards, copings, ornamental and ventilation hoods, vertical and horizontal siding panels, trim, etc. The sheet metal classification also applies to the vast variety of coated metal material panels and composite metal material panels that have evolved over the years as an alternative to conventional ferrous and non‐ferrous metals like steel, iron, tin, copper, brass, bronze, aluminum, etc. Insulated metal and insulated composite panels are still installed by the Iron Worker. Fabrication, handling, assembling, erecting, altering, repairing, etc. of architectural metal roof, standing seam roof, composite metal roof, metal and composite bathroom/toilet partitions, aluminum gutters, metal and composite lockers and shelving, kitchen equipment, and walk‐in coolers.

Truck Drivers

• Truck Drivers delivering asphalt are covered under prevailing wage while on the site and directly involved in the paving operation.

• Material men and deliverymen are not covered under prevailing wage as long as they are not directly involved in the construction process. If, they unload the material, they would then be covered by prevailing wage for the classification they are performing work in: laborer, equipment operator, etc.

• Hauling material off site is not covered provided they are not dumping it at a location outlined above.

• Driving a truck on site and moving equipment or materials on site would be considered covered work, as hs is part of the construction process.

Any questions regarding the proper classification should be directed to the Contract Compliance Unit, Wage and Workplace Standards Division, Connecticut Department of Labor, 200 Folly Brook Blvd, Wethersfield, CT 06 109 at (860) 263‐6543.

Informational Bulletin

THE 10-HOUR OSHA CONSTRUCTION SAFETY AND HEALTH COURSE

(applicable to public building contracts entered into on or after July 1, 2007, where the total cost of all work to be performed is at least $100,000)

(1) This requirement was created by Public Act No. 06-175, which is codified in

Section 31-53b of the Connecticut General Statutes (pertaining to the prevailing wage statutes);

(2) The course is required for public building construction contracts (projects funded

in whole or in part by the state or any political subdivision of the state) entered into on or after July 1, 2007;

(3) It is required of private employees (not state or municipal employees) and

apprentices who perform manual labor for a general contractor or subcontractor on a public building project where the total cost of all work to be performed is at least $100,000;

(4) The ten-hour construction course pertains to the ten-hour Outreach Course

conducted in accordance with federal OSHA Training Institute standards, and, for telecommunications workers, a ten-hour training course conducted in accordance with federal OSHA standard, 29 CFR 1910.268;

(5) The internet website for the federal OSHA Training Institute is

http://www.osha.gov/fso/ote/training/edcenters/fact_sheet.html;

(6) The statutory language leaves it to the contractor and its employees to determine who pays for the cost of the ten-hour Outreach Course;

(7) Within 30 days of receiving a contract award, a general contractor must furnish

proof to the Labor Commissioner that all employees and apprentices performing manual labor on the project will have completed such a course;

(8) Proof of completion may be demonstrated through either: (a) the presentation of a

bona fide student course completion card issued by the federal OSHA Training Institute; or (2) the presentation of documentation provided to an employee by a trainer certified by the Institute pending the actual issuance of the completion card;

(9) Any card with an issuance date more than 5 years prior to the commencement

date of the construction project shall not constitute proof of compliance;

http://www.osha.gov/fso/ote/training/edcenters/fact_sheet.html

(10) Each employer shall affix a copy of the construction safety course completion card to the certified payroll submitted to the contracting agency in accordance with Conn. Gen. Stat. § 31-53(f) on which such employee’s name first appears;

(11) Any employee found to be in non-compliance shall be subject to removal from

the worksite if such employee does not provide satisfactory proof of course completion to the Labor Commissioner by the fifteenth day after the date the employee is determined to be in noncompliance;

(12) Any such employee who is determined to be in noncompliance may continue to

work on a public building construction project for a maximum of fourteen consecutive calendar days while bringing his or her status into compliance;

(13) The Labor Commissioner may make complaint to the prosecuting authorities

regarding any employer or agent of the employer, or officer or agent of the corporation who files a false certified payroll with respect to the status of an employee who is performing manual labor on a public building construction project;

(14) The statute provides the minimum standards required for the completion of a

safety course by manual laborers on public construction contracts; any contractor can exceed these minimum requirements; and

(15) Regulations clarifying the statute are currently in the regulatory process, and shall

be posted on the CTDOL website as soon as they are adopted in final form. (16) Any questions regarding this statute may be directed to the Wage and Workplace

Standards Division of the Connecticut Labor Department via the internet website of http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/wgemenu.htm; or by telephone at (860)263-6790.

THE ABOVE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED EXCLUSIVELY AS AN EDUCATIONAL RESOURCE, AND IS NOT INTENDED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR LEGAL INTERPRETATIONS WHICH MAY ULTMATELY ARISE CONCERNIG THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE STATUTE OR THE REGULATIONS.

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/wgemenu.htm

Sec. 31-53b. Construction safety and health course. New miner training program. Proof of completion required for mechanics, laborers and workers on public works projects. Enforcement. Regulations. Exceptions. (a) Each contract for a public works project entered into on or after July 1, 2009, by the state or any of its agents, or by any political subdivision of the state or any of its agents, described in subsection (g) of section 31-53, shall contain a provision requiring that each contractor furnish proof with the weekly certified payroll form for the first week each employee begins work on such project that any person performing the work of a mechanic, laborer or worker pursuant to the classifications of labor under section 31-53 on such public works project, pursuant to such contract, has completed a course of at least ten hours in duration in construction safety and health approved by the federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration or, has completed a new miner training program approved by the Federal Mine Safety and Health Administration in accordance with 30 CFR 48 or, in the case of telecommunications employees, has completed at least ten hours of training in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.268. (b) Any person required to complete a course or program under subsection (a) of this section who has not completed the course or program shall be subject to removal from the worksite if the person does not provide documentation of having completed such course or program by the fifteenth day after the date the person is found to be in noncompliance. The Labor Commissioner or said commissioner's designee shall enforce this section. (c) Not later than January 1, 2009, the Labor Commissioner shall adopt regulations, in accordance with the provisions of chapter 54, to implement the provisions of subsections (a) and (b) of this section. Such regulations shall require that the ten-hour construction safety and health courses required under subsection (a) of this section be conducted in accordance with federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration Training Institute standards, or in accordance with Federal Mine Safety and Health Administration Standards or in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.268, as appropriate. The Labor Commissioner shall accept as sufficient proof of compliance with the provisions of subsection (a) or (b) of this section a student course completion card issued by the federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration Training Institute, or such other proof of compliance said commissioner deems appropriate, dated no earlier than five years before the commencement date of such public works project. (d) This section shall not apply to employees of public service companies, as defined in section 16-1, or drivers of commercial motor vehicles driving the vehicle on the public works project and delivering or picking up cargo from public works projects provided they perform no labor relating to the project other than the loading and unloading of their cargo. (P.A. 06-175, S. 1; P.A. 08-83, S. 1.) History: P.A. 08-83 amended Subsec. (a) by making provisions applicable to public works project contracts entered into on or after July 1, 2009, replacing provision re total cost of work with reference to Sec. 31-53(g), requiring proof in certified payroll form that new mechanic, laborer or worker has completed a 10-hour or more construction safety course and adding provision re new miner training program, amended Subsec. (b) by substituting "person" for "employee" and adding "or program", amended Subsec. (c) by adding "or in accordance with Federal Mine

Safety and Health Administration Standards" and setting new deadline of January 1, 2009, deleted former Subsec. (d) re "public building", added new Subsec. (d) re exemptions for public service company employees and delivery drivers who perform no labor other than delivery and made conforming and technical changes, effective January 1, 2009.

Sec. 31-55a

Statute 31-55a

Last Updated: July 13, 2009

You are here: DOL Web Site Wage and Workplace Standards Statute 31-55a

- Special Notice -

To All State and Political Subdivisions,Their Agents, and Contractors

Connecticut General Statute 31-55a - Annual adjustments to wage rates by contractors doing state work.

Each contractor that is awarded a contract on or after October 1, 2002, for (1) the construction of a state highway or bridge that falls under the provisions of section 31-54 of the general statutes, or (2) the construction, remodeling, refinishing, refurbishing, rehabilitation, alteration or repair of any public works project that falls under the provisions of section 31-53 of the general statutes shall contact the Labor Commissioner on or before July first of each year, for the duration of such contract, to ascertain the prevailing rate of wages on an hourly basis

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/laws-regs/statute31-55a.htm (1 of 2) [2/1/2010 10:09:07 AM]

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/index.htm


http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/laws-regs/statute31-55a.htm

Sec. 31-55a

and the amount of payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each mechanic, laborer or worker employed upon the work contracted to be done, and shall make any necessary adjustments to such prevailing rate of wages and such payment or contributions paid or payable on behalf of each such employee, effective each July first.

● The prevailing wage rates applicable to any contract or subcontract awarded on or after October 1, 2002 are subject to annual adjustments each July 1st for the duration of any project which was originally advertised for bids on or after October 1, 2002.

● Each contractor affected by the above requirement shall pay the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate that is in effect each July 1st, as posted by the Department of Labor.

● It is the contractor ’ s responsibility to obtain the annual adjusted prevailing wage rate increases directly from the Department of Labor’s Web Site. The annual adjustments will be posted on the Department of Labor Web page: www.ctdol.state.ct.us. For those without internet access, please contact the division listed below.

● The Department of Labor will continue to issue the initial prevailing wage rate schedule to the Contracting Agency for the project. All subsequent annual adjustments will be posted on our Web Site for contractor access.

Any questions should be directed to the Contract Compliance Unit, Wage and Workplace Standards Division, Connecticut Department of Labor, 200 Folly Brook Blvd., Wethersfield, CT 06109 at (860)263-6790.

Workplace Laws

Published by the Connecticut Department of Labor, Project Management Office

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/laws-regs/statute31-55a.htm (2 of 2) [2/1/2010 10:09:07 AM]

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/laws-regs/workplace-laws.htm

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/laws-regs/statute31-55a.htm

~NOTICE~

TO ALL CONTRACTING AGENCIES

Please be advised that Connecticut General Statutes Section 31-53, requires the contracting agency tocertify to the Department of Labor, the total dollar amount of work to be done in connection with suchpublic works project, regardless of whether such project consists of one or more contracts.

Please find the attached “Contracting Agency Certification Form” to be completed and returned tothe Department of Labor, Wage and Workplace Standards Division, Public Contract Compliance Unit.

O Inquiries can be directed to (860)263-6543.

CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF LABORWAGE AND WORKPLACE STANDARDS DIVISION

CONTRACT COMPLIANCE UNIT

CONTRACTING AGENCY CERTIFICATION FORM

I, , acting in my official capacity as , authorized representative title

for , located at , contracting agency address

do hereby certify that the total dollar amount of work to be done in connection with

, located at , project name and number address

shall be $ , which includes all work, regardless of whether such project

consists of one or more contracts.

CONTRACTOR INFORMATION

Name:

Address: Authorized Representative: Approximate Starting Date:

Approximate Completion Date:

Signature Date

Return To: Connecticut Department of LaborWage & Workplace Standards DivisionContract Compliance Unit200 Folly Brook Blvd.Wethersfield, CT 06109

Date Issued: ___________________________

CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF LABOR WAGE AND WORKPLACE STANDARDS DIVISION

CONTRACTORS WAGE CERTIFICATION FORM

I, of Officer, Owner, Authorized Rep. Company Name do hereby certify that the Company Name Street City and all of its subcontractors will pay all workers on the Project Name and Number Street and City the wages as listed in the schedule of prevailing rates required for such project (a copy of which is attached hereto). Signed Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , . Return to:

Notary Public

Connecticut Department of Labor Wage & Workplace Standards Division 200 Folly Brook Blvd. Wethersfield, CT 06109 Rate Schedule Issued (Date):

Certified Payroll Form WWS - CPI

Certified Payroll Form WWS - CPI

Last Updated: October 08, 2009

You are here: DOL Web Site Wage and Workplace Standards Certified Payroll Form WWS - CPI

In accordance with Connecticut General Statutes, 31-53 Certified Payrolls with a statement of compliance shall be submitted monthly to the contracting agency.

Note: Once you have downloaded these forms and are ready to print them out, set the print function on your PC to the horizontal print orientation.

Note2: Please download both the Payroll Certification for Public Works Projects and the Certified Statement of Compliance for a complete package. The Certified Statement of Compliance appears on the same page as the Fringe Benefits Explanation page.

Announcement: The Certified Payroll Form WWS-CPI can now be completed on-line!

● Certified Payroll Form WWS-CPI (PDF, 727KB)

● Sample Completed Form (PDF, 101KB)

Published by the Connecticut Department of Labor, Project Management Office

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/forms/payrollcert.htm [2/1/2010 10:11:11 AM]

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/index.htm


http://www.cga.ct.gov/2001/pub/Chap557.htm#sec31-53.htm

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/prevailing-rates/PrevailingWageGuide/payrollcert1.pdf

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/forms/payrollcert-sample.pdf

http://www.ctdol.state.ct.us/wgwkstnd/forms/payrollcert.htm

November 29, 2006

NoticeTo All Mason Contractors and Interested Parties

Regarding Construction Pursuant to Section 31-53 of theConnecticut General Statutes (Prevailing Wage)

The Connecticut Labor Department Wage and Workplace Standards Division is empowered toenforce the prevailing wage rates on projects covered by the above referenced statute.

Over the past few years the Division has withheld enforcement of the rate in effect for workerswho operate a forklift on a prevailing wage rate project due to a potential jurisdictional dispute.

The rate listed in the schedules and in our Occupational Bulletin (see enclosed) has been asfollows:

Forklift Operator:

- Laborers (Group 4) Mason Tenders - operates forklift solely to assist a mason to a maximumheight of nine feet only.

- Power Equipment Operator (Group 9) - operates forklift to assist any trade and to assist amason to a height over nine feet.

The U.S. Labor Department conducted a survey of rates in Connecticut but it has not beenpublished and the rate in effect remains as outlined in the above Occupational Bulletin.

Since this is a classification matter and not one of jurisdiction, effective January 1,2007 the Connecticut Labor Department will enforce the rate on each schedule inaccordance with our statutory authority.

Your cooperation in filing appropriate and accurate certified payrolls is appreciated.

Connecticut Department of Labor

Wage and Workplace Standards Division FOOTNOTES

Please Note: If the “Benefits” listed on the schedule for the following occupations includes a letter(s) (+ a or + a+b for instance), refer to the information below.

Benefits to be paid at the appropriate prevailing wage rate for the listed occupation.

If the “Benefits” section for the occupation lists only a dollar amount, disregard the information below. Bricklayers, Cement Masons, Cement Finishers, Concrete Finishers (including caulking),

Stone Masons (Building Construction) and

(Residential- Hartford, Middlesex, New Haven, New London and Tolland Counties)

a. Paid Holiday: Employees shall receive 4 hours for Christmas Eve holiday provided the employee works the regularly scheduled day before and after the holiday. Employers may schedule work on Christmas Eve and employees shall receive pay for actual hours worked in addition to holiday pay.

Bricklayer (Residential- Fairfield County)

a. Paid Holiday: If an employee works on Christmas Eve until noon he shall be paid

for 8 hours.

Electricians Fairfield County: West of the Five Mile River in Norwalk a. $2.00 per hour not to exceed $14.00 per day.

Elevator Constructors: Mechanics

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans’ Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, plus the Friday after Thanksgiving.

b. Vacation: Employer contributes 8% of basic hourly rate for 5 years or more

of service or 6% of basic hourly rate for 6 months to 5 years of service as vacation pay credit.

Glaziers

a. Paid Holidays: Labor Day and Christmas Day.

Power Equipment Operators (Heavy and Highway Construction & Building Construction)

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial day, Independence Day,

Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, provided the employee works 3 days during the week in which the holiday falls, if scheduled, and if scheduled, the working day before and the working day after the holiday. Holidays falling on Saturday may be observed on Saturday, or if the employer so elects, on the preceding Friday.

Ironworkers

a. Paid Holiday: Labor Day provided employee has been on the payroll for the 5 consecutive work days prior to Labor Day.

Laborers (Tunnel Construction)

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. No employee shall be eligible for holiday pay when he fails, without cause, to work the regular work day preceding the holiday or the regular work day following the holiday.

Roofers

a. Paid Holidays: July 4th, Labor Day, and Christmas Day provided the employee is employed 15 days prior to the holiday.

Sprinkler Fitters

a. Paid Holidays: Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, provided the employee has been in the employment of a contractor 20 working days prior to any such paid holiday.

Truck Drivers

(Heavy and Highway Construction & Building Construction)

a. Paid Holidays: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas day, and Good Friday, provided the employee has at least 31 calendar days of service and works the last scheduled day before and the first scheduled day after the holiday, unless excused.

Date post:	17-Aug-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times